Download SERVICE MANUAL

DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/
NS405/NS410/NS415
RMT-D141A/D142A/D142O/D142P
US Model
Canadian Model
SERVICE MANUAL
DVP-NS315/NS415
AEP Model
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS405/NS410
UK Model
DVP-NS305/NS405
Russian Model
Hong Kong Model
Korea Model
Taiwan Model
Saudi Arabia Model
GA Model
Indian Model
Pakistan Model
Malaysia Model
DVP-NS305
Middle East Model
Oceania Model
DVP-NS305/NS415
Photo : DVP-NS415
RMT-D142A
PX Model
Mexico Model
Latin Model
Argentina Model
Brazilian Model
DVP-NS315
SPECIFICATIONS
System
Laser: Semiconductor laser
Signal format system: NTSC/PAL
(To change the color system)
Audio characteristics
Frequency response: DVD VIDEO (PCM
96 kHz): 2 Hz to 44 kHz (±1.0 dB)/DVD
VIDEO (PCM 48 kHz): 2 Hz to 22 kHz
(±0.5 dB)/CD: 2 Hz to 20 kHz (±0.5 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio (S/N ratio): 115 dB
(LINE OUT (L/R) AUDIO jacks only)
Harmonic distortion: 0.003 %
Dynamic range: DVD VIDEO: 103 dB/CD:
99 dB
Wow and flutter: Less than detected value
(±0.001% W PEAK)
The signals from LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO)
jacks are measured. When you play PCM
sound tracks with a 96 kHz sampling
frequency, the output signals from the
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL)
jack are converted to 48 kHz sampling
frequency.
Outputs/Inputs (DVP-NS315/NS415)
Outputs (DVP-NS305/NS310/NS405/NS410)
(Jack name: Jack type/Output or Input level/
Load impedance)
LINE IN (AUDIO)*: Phono jack/–/47
kilohms (DVP-NS315/NS415)
LINE OUT (AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/
Over 10 kilohms
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL)*: Optical
output jack/–18 dBm (wave length:
660 nm)
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL): Phono jack/
0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT(Y, PB, PR):
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p/PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p/
75 ohms (DVP-NS315/NS415)
LINE IN (VIDEO)*: Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p/
75 ohms (DVP-NS315/NS415)
LINE OUT (VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p/
75 ohms
S VIDEO OUT: 4-pin mini DIN/Y:
1.0 Vp-p, C: 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms
* DVP-NS405/NS410/NS415 only
General
Power requirements: 120 V AC, 60 Hz/
110 to 240V AC, 50/60 Hz
See page 1-1 for further information.
Power consumption: 12 W/13 W
See page 1-1 for further information.
Dimensions (approx.): 430 × 62 × 255 mm
(17 × 2 1/2 × 10 1/8 in.) (width/height/
depth) incl. projecting parts
Mass (approx.): 2.3 kg (5 5/64 lb)
Operating temperature: 5 ° C to 35 ° C
(41 ° F to 95 ° F)
Operating humidity: 25 % to 80 %
Supplied accessories
See page 1-3.
Specifications and design are subject to
change without notice.
ENERGY STARR is a U.S. registered mark.
As an ENERGY STARR Partner, Sony
Corporation has determined that this product
meets the ENERGY STARR guidelines for
energy efficiency.
CD/DVD PLAYER
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following
safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes
and bridges.
Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.
Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.
Look for parts which, though functioning, show obvious signs
of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and
recommend their replacement.
Check the line cord for cracks and abrasion.
Recommend the replacement of any such line cord to the
customer.
Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
Check the antenna terminals, metal trim, "metallized" knobs,
screws, and all other exposed metal parts for AC leakage.
Check leakage as described below.
1.5 kΩ
The AC leakage from any exposed metal part to earth ground and
from all exposed metal parts to any exposed metal part having a
return to chassis, must not exceed 0.5mA (500 microampers).
Leakage current can be measured by any one of three methods.
1.
2.
3.
A commercial leakage tester, such as the Simpson 229 or RCA
TW-540A. Follow the manufacturers' instructions to use these
instruments.
A battery-operated AC milliammeter. The Data Precision 245
digital multimeter is suitable for this job.
Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor by means of a
VOM or battery-operated AC voltmeter. The "limit" indication
is 0.75V, so analog meters must have an accurate low voltage
scale. The Simpson 250 and Sanwa SH-63Trd are examples
of a passive VOM that is suitable. Nearly all battery operated
digital multimeters that have a 2V AC range are suitable. (See
Fig. A)
Unleaded solder
Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the leadfree mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.
(Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with
the lead free mark due to their particular size.)
To Exposed Metal
Parts on Set
0.15 µF
LEAKAGE TEST
AC
Voltmeter
(0.75 V)
Earth Ground
Fig. A. Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage.
WARNING!!
WHEN SERVICING, DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER EXIT WITH
THE EYE TOO CLOSELY. IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO
CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION, BE SURE TO OBSERVE
FROM A DISTANCE OF MORE THAN 25 cm FROM THE SURFACE
OF THE OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK.
: LEAD FREE MARK
Unleaded solder has the following characteristics.
• Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than
ordinary solder.
Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be
applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time.
Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to
about 350°C.
Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the
heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!
• Strong viscosity
Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than
ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such
as on IC pins, etc.
• Usable with ordinary solder
It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may
also be added to ordinary solder.
CAUTION:
The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye
hazard.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures
other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH
MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS
PUBLISHED BY SONY.
ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT
À LA SÉCURITÉ!
LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES
DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT
CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE
REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY
DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
—2—
SERVICE NOTE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2. DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
DISC REMOVAL PROCEDURE (at POWER OFF) ········ 5
HOW TO SERVICE MB-103 BOARD ······························ 5
1.
GENERAL
Precautions ············································································· 1-1
About this Manual ································································· 1-1
This Player Can Play the Following Discs ···························· 1-1
Notes about the Discs ···························································· 1-1
Index to Parts and Controls ···················································· 1-2
Guide to On-Screen Displays (Control Bar) ························· 1-3
Simple Start Guide ···································································· 1-3
Quick Overview ····································································· 1-3
Step 1: Unpacking ································································· 1-3
Step 2: Inserting Batteries into the Remote ··························· 1-3
Step 3: TV Hookups ······························································ 1-4
Step 4: Playing a Disc ···························································· 1-4
Hookups ···················································································· 1-4
Hooking Up the Player ·························································· 1-4
Step 1: Connecting the Video Cords ····································· 1-4
Step 2: Connecting the Audio Cords ···································· 1-5
Step 3: Connecting the Power Cord ······································· 1-6
Step 4: Quick Setup ······························································· 1-6
Playing Discs ············································································· 1-6
Playing Discs ········································································· 1-6
Searching for a Particular Point on a Disc (Scan, Slow-motion
Play, Search, Freeze Frame) ··············································· 1-7
Resuming Playback from the Point Where You Stopped the
Disc (Resume Play/Multi-disc Resume). ···························· 1-7
Using the DVD’s Menu ························································ 1-8
Playing VIDEO CDs with PBC Functions (PBC Playback) · 1-8
Playing an MP3 Audio Track ················································ 1-8
Various Play Mode Functions (Program Play, Shuffle Play,
Repeat Play, A-B Repeat Play) ··········································· 1-8
Searching for a Scene ····························································· 1-10
Searching for a Title/Chapter/Track/Index/Scene
(Search mode) ·································································· 1-10
Viewing Information About the Disc ······································· 1-10
Checking the Playing Time and Remaining Time ·············· 1-10
Sound Adjustments ································································· 1-10
Changing the Sound ····························································· 1-10
TV Virtual Surround Settings (TVS) ·································· 1-11
Enjoying Movies ····································································· 1-11
Changing the Angles ··························································· 1-11
Displaying the Subtitles ······················································· 1-11
Adjusting the Picture Quality (BNR) ································· 1-12
Adjusting the Playback Picture (CUSTOM PICTURE MODE) · 1-12
Enhancing the Playback Picture (DIGITAL VIDEO
ENHANCER) (DVP-NS415 only) ··································· 1-12
Using Various Additional Functions ········································ 1-12
Locking Discs (CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL,
PARENTAL CONTROL) ················································· 1-12
Controlling Your TV with the Supplied Remote ················· 1-13
Settings and Adjustments ······················································· 1-14
Using the Setup Display. ····················································· 1-14
Setting the Display or Sound Track Language
(LANGUAGE SETUP) ···················································· 1-14
Settings for the Display (SCREEN SETUP) ······················ 1-14
Custom Settings (CUSTOM SETUP) ································ 1-15
Settings for the Sound (AUDIO SETUP) ···························· 1-15
Additional Information ···························································· 1-15
Troubleshooting ·································································· 1-15
Self-diagnosis Function (When letters/numbers appear
in the display) ··································································· 1-16
Glossary ·············································································· 1-16
Language Code List ····························································· 1-16
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
2-11.
2-12.
UPPER CASE ································································· 2-1
FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY and FR SUPPORT ·········· 2-1
LOADING ASSEMBLY ················································· 2-2
OPTICAL DEVICE (KHM-270AAA) ··························· 2-2
DC MOTOR and MS-81 BOARD ·································· 2-3
ER-14R BOARD ····························································· 2-3
AV-61 BOARD ································································ 2-4
MB-103 BOARD ····························································· 2-4
IF-89 BOARD ································································· 2-5
SWITCHING REGULATOR ·········································· 2-5
INTERNAL VIEWS ························································ 2-6
CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ··································· 2-7
3.
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
3-7.
3-8.
3-9.
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM ···································· 3-1
RF/SERVO BLOCK DIAGRAM ···································· 3-3
SIGNAL PROCESSOR BLOCK DIAGRAM ················ 3-5
SYSTEM CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM ··················· 3-7
VIDEO BLOCK DIAGRAM ·········································· 3-9
AUDIO BLOCK DIAGRAM ········································ 3-11
INTERFACE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM ··········· 3-13
POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ······························ 3-15
POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ······························ 3-17
4.
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ································ 4-1
4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM ······································································ 4-4
WAVEFORMS ································································ 4-5
• IF-89 (IF COM)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ························· 4-7
• IF-89 (IF COM)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-9
• MB-103 (DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO,
MOTOR DRIVE, SERVO, AV DECODER, SDRAM,
SYSTEM CONTROL, AUDIO DAC, PLL)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-11
• MB-103 (DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO) (1/7)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-15
• MB-103 (MOTOR DRIVE) (2/7)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-17
• MB-103 (SERVO) (3/7)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-19
• MB-103 (AV DECODER) (4/7)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-21
• MB-103 (SDRAM) (5/7)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-23
• MB-103 (SYSTEM CONTROL) (6/7)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-25
• MB-103 (AUDIO DAC, PLL) (7/7)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-27
• AV-61 (AUDIO OUT, VIDEO OUT)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-29
• AV-61 (AUDIO OUT) (1/2)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-31
• AV-61 (VIDEO OUT) (2/2)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-33
• ER-14 (AV AMP)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-35
• ER-14 (AV AMP)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-37
• HS11S1, HS11S1F (SWITCHING REGULATOR)
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS ····················· 4-39
• HS11S1, HS11S1F (SWITCHING REGULATOR)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-41
—3—
5.
IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
5-1. SYSTEM CONTROL PIN FUNCTION
(MB-103 BOARD IC104: MB91307RPFV-G-BND-E1) · 5-1
6.
TEST MODE
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
6-9.
6-10.
6-11.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION ··········································· 6-1
STARTING TEST MODE ··············································· 6-1
SYSCON DIAGNOSIS ··················································· 6-1
DRIVE AUTO ADJUSTMENT ······································ 6-5
DRIVE MANUAL OPERATION ··································· 6-7
MECHA AGING ··························································· 6-11
EMERGENCY HISTORY ············································ 6-11
VERSION INFORMATION ········································· 6-11
VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ·································· 6-11
IF CON SELF DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ················· 6-12
TROUBLESHOOTING ················································ 6-19
7.
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT
7-1.
1.
7-2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7-3.
POWER SUPPLY CHECK ············································· 7-1
SRV1246JUC Board ························································ 7-1
ADJUSTMENT OF VIDEO SYSTEM ··························· 7-2
Video Level Adjustment (MB-103 BOARD) ·················· 7-2
Checking S Video Output S-Y ········································· 7-2
Checking S Video Output S-C ········································· 7-2
Checking Component Video Output Y ···························· 7-2
Checking Component Video Output B-Y ························ 7-3
Checking Component Video Output R-Y ························ 7-3
ADJUSTMENT RELATED PARTS ARRANGEMENT · 7-4
8.
REPAIR PARTS LIST
8-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 8-1
8-1-1. MAIN SECTION ···························································· 8-2
8-1-2. MECHANISM DECK SECTION ··································· 8-4
8-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ·········································· 8-6
—4—
SERVICE NOTE
1.
1)
2)
DISC REMOVAL PROCEDURE (at POWER OFF)
Insert a tapering driver into the aperture of the unit bottom, and move the lever of chuck cam in the direction of the arrow A. (See Fig. 1)
Draw out the tray in the direction of the arrow B, and remove a disc. (See Fig. 1)
The lever of a zipper cam
Hole
Tray
B
A
Fig. 1.
2.
HOW TO SERVICE MB-103 BOARD
• Jig
1)
2)
3)
CK-122 board
(J-6090-129-A)
Remove the upper case from the main unit. (Refer to 2-1)
Remove the MB-103 board. (Refer to 2-7)
Set the removed MB-103 board and CK-122 board to the stand
as shown in Fig. 2.
Stand
(CK-121 board)
(J-6090-132-A)
6 CK-122 board
CK-120 board
(J-6090-127-A)
5 Connector (CN601)
1 MB-103 board
4 Two screws (B3)
Harness 6P (J-6090-126-A)
Flexible flat cable five
FFC 26P J-6090-117-A,
FFC 9P J-6090-118-A,
FFC 5P J-6090-119-A,
FFC 15P J-6090-121-A,
FFC 25P J-6090-122-A
3 Connector (CN101)
2 Stand
Fig. 2.
—5—
4)
Fix the CK-120 board to the location where the MB-103 board is removed.
3 FMM-041 flexible board (CN101, 26P)
4 FMO-004 flexible board (CN103, 9P)
5 MF-128 Harness (CN109, 6P)
2 four screws
(SUMIEITE(B3)+BV)
6 FMS-17 flexible board (CN105, 5P)
1 CK-120 board
7 Connector (CN113, 25P)
8 Connector (CN111, 9P)
Fig. 3.
5)
Set the five flexible flat cables and the harness as shown in Fig. 4 and Fig. 5.
1 Flat cable
(FFC 25P :CN301(CK-122 board)
2 Flat cable (FFC 9P :CN204)
3 Flat cable (FFC 5P CN201)
2 Connector (CN114)
7 Connector (CN102)
1 Flat cable (FFC 26P :CN203)
4 Connector
(CN106)
4 Harness 6P (CN110)
8 Flat cable
(FFC 15P :CN202(CK-121 board))
3 Harness 6P (CN102)
5 Connector
(CN104)
6 Connector
(CN112)
Fig. 4.
Fig. 5.
—6—
6)
Set complete!
Fig. 6.
—7—
MEMO
—8—
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
SECTION 1
GENERAL
This section is extracted from instruction
manual. (DVP-NS315/NS415 : 3-073379-11)
For the model supplied with the AC plug
adaptor
Precautions
• The power requirements and power
consumption of this player are indicated on
the back of the player. Check that the
player’s operating voltage is identical with
your local power supply.
If the AC plug of your unit does not fit into
the wall autlet, attach the supplied AC plug
adaptor.
On operation
X
Power requirements and
power consumption t
DVP–XXXX
00V 00Hz
00W
NO.
0-000-000-00
On safety
• Caution – The use of optical instruments
with this product will increase eye hazard.
• To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not
place objects filled with liquids, such as
vases, on the apparatus.
• Should any solid object or liquid fall into
the cabinet, unplug the player and have it
checked by qualified personnel before
operating it any further.
On power sources
• The player is not disconnected from the AC
power source as long as it is connected to
the wall outlet, even if the player itself has
been turned off.
• If you are not going to use the player for a
long time, be sure to disconnect the player
from the wall outlet. To disconnect the AC
power cord, grasp the plug itself; never pull
the cord.
• Should the AC power cord need to be
changed, have it done at a qualified service
shop only.
On placement
• Place the player in a location with adequate
ventilation to prevent heat build-up in the
player.
• Do not place the player on a soft surface
such as a rug that might block the
ventilation holes on the bottom.
• Do not place the player in a location near
heat sources, or in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust, or mechanical
shock.
• If the player is brought directly from a cold
to a warm location, or is placed in a very
damp room, moisture may condense on the
lenses inside the player. Should this occur,
the player may not operate properly. In this
case, remove the disc and leave the player
turned on for about half an hour until the
moisture evaporates.
• When you move the player, take out any
discs. If you don’t, the disc may be
damaged.
On adjusting volume
Do not turn up the volume while listening to
a section with very low level inputs or no
audio signals. If you do, the speakers may be
damaged when a peak level section is played.
On cleaning
Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a
soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild
detergent solution. Do not use any type of
abrasive pad, scouring powder or solvent
such as alcohol or benzine.
If you have any questions or problems
concerning your player, please consult your
nearest Sony dealer.
On cleaning discs
Do not use a commercially available cleaning
disc. It may cause a malfunction.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Caution: This player is capable of holding a
still video image or on-screen display image
on your television screen indefinitely. If
you leave the still video image or on-screen
display image displayed on your TV for an
extended period of time you risk permanent
damage to your television screen.
Projection televisions are especially
susceptible to this.
3
About this Manual
Check your model name
The instructions in this manual are for the 2
models: DVP-NS315 and DVP-NS415.
Check your model name by looking at the
front panel of the player. DVP-NS415 is the
model used for illustration purposes. Any
difference in operation is clearly indicated
in the text, for example, “DVP-NS415
only.”
• Instructions in this manual describe the
controls on the remote. You can also use the
controls on the player if they have the same
or similar names as those on the remote.
• The meaning of the icons used in this
manual is described below:
Icon
Meaning
Functions available for DVD
VIDEOs or DVD-Rs/DVDRWs in video mode
Functions available for VIDEO
CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in
video CD format
Functions available for DATA
CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CDRWs containing MP3* audio
tracks)
Functions available for music
CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in
music CD format
* MP3 (MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3) is a standard
format defined by ISO/MPEG which compresses
audio data.
This Player Can Play the
Following Discs
Format of discs
DVD VIDEO
VIDEO CD
• A disc recorded in a color system other than
NTSC, such as PAL or SECAM (this player
conforms to the NTSC color system).
• A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g.,
card, heart).
• A disc with paper or stickers on it.
• A disc that has the adhesive of cellophane
tape or a sticker still left on it.
Format of discs
Music CD
The “DVD VIDEO” logo is a trademark.
Region code
Your player has a region code printed on the
back of the unit and only will play DVD
VIDEO discs (playback only) labeled with
identical region codes. This system is used to
protect copyrights.
DVDs labeled
player.
ALL
will also play on this
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or
heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave it
in a car parked in direct sunlight as the
temperature may rise considerably inside
the car.
• After playing, store the disc in its case.
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.
Wipe the disc from the center out.
Note on playback operations of
DVDs and VIDEO CDs
Some playback operations of DVDs and
VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by
software producers. Since this player plays
DVDs and VIDEO CDs according to the disc
contents the software producers designed,
some playback features may not be available.
Also, refer to the instructions supplied with
the DVDs or VIDEO CDs.
Region code
DVP–XXXX
00V 00Hz
00W
• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its
edge. Do not touch the surface.
Note
Some CD-Rs, CD-RWs, DVD-Rs, or DVD-RWs
(in video mode) cannot be played on this player due
to the recording quality or physical condition of the
disc, or the characteristics of the recording device.
Furthermore, the disc will not play if it has not been
correctly finalized. For more information, see the
operating instructions for the recording device.
Note that discs created in the Packet Write format
cannot be played.
If you try to play any other DVD, the message
“Playback prohibited by area limitations.”
will appear on the TV screen. Depending on
the DVD, no region code indication may be
labeled even though playing the DVD is
prohibited by area restrictions.
X
Notes about the Discs
NO.
0-000-000-00
Example of discs that the player
cannot play
The player cannot play the following discs:
• All CD-ROMs (including PHOTO CDs)/
CD-Rs/CD-RWs other than those recorded
in the following formats:
–music CD format
–video CD format
–MP3 format that conforms to ISO9660*
Level 1/Level 2, or its extended format,
Joliet
• Data part of CD-Extras
• DVD-RWs in VR mode
• DVD-ROMs
• DVD Audio discs
• HD layer on Super Audio CDs
• Do not use solvents such as benzine,
thinner, commercially available cleaners, or
anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.
Copyrights
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is protected by
method claims of certain U.S. patents, other
intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation, and other rights
owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses only
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision
Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
* A logical format of files and folders on CDROMs, defined by ISO (International Standard
Organization).
Also, the player cannot play the following
discs:
• A DVD with a different region code.
6
7
1-1
Front panel display
Index to Parts and Controls
When playing back a DVD
For more information, refer to the pages indicated in parentheses.
Front panel
Disc type
Playing status
Lights up when you can change the angle (47)
DVP-NS315
Lights up during
Repeat Play (38)
Current title/chapter or playing
time (41)
Current audio signal (43)
When playing back a VIDEO CD with Playback Control (PBC) (32)
DVP-NS415
Disc type
Playing status
Lights up during A-B
Repeat Play (39)
A [/1 (on/standby) button/indicator (27)
Lights up in green when the power is on
and lights up in red when the player is in
standby mode.
B Disc tray (27)
C A (open/close) button (27)
D Front panel display (9)
E
(remote sensor) (15)
F Playback Dial (DVP-NS315) (28) (30)
Multi-mode Playback Dial (DVPNS415) (28) (30)
G MODE CHANGE button (DVPNS415 only) (30)
H x (stop) button (28)
I X (pause) button (28)
J SURROUND button (44)
K PICTURE MODE button (49)
Current scene or playing time (41)
When playing back a CD, DATA CD (MP3 audio), or VIDEO CD (without PBC)
Playing status
Disc type
Lights up during
Repeat Play (38)
Current track (41)
Lights up when playing MP3 audio tracks (33)
Playing time (41)
,continued
8
Rear panel
Remote
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS315
DIGITAL OUT
LINE OUT
PCM/DTS/
DOLBY DIGITAL
COAXIAL
R-AUDIO-L
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
PB
DVP-NS415
DIGITAL OUT
LINE
IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
Y
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
PB
PR
OUT R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
A DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack (22)
(23) (24)
B DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) jack
(DVP-NS415 only) (22) (23) (24)
C LINE IN L/R (AUDIO) jacks (DVPNS415 only) (16) (18)
D LINE IN (VIDEO) jack (DVP-NS415
only) (16) (18)
Z OPEN/CLOSE button (28)
SUR (surround) button (44)
SUBTITLE button (47)
AUDIO button (43)
ANGLE button (47)
CLEAR button (35)
./> PREV/NEXT (previous/
next) buttons (28)
H
m/M
SCAN/SLOW
buttons (29)
I X PAUSE button (28)
J H PLAY button (27)
Y
PR
PCM/DTS/
DOLBY DIGITAL
COAXIAL OPTICAL
9
E S VIDEO OUT jack (18)
F COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks
(18)
G LINE OUT (VIDEO) jack (18)
H LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) jacks (21)
(22) (23)
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
The H button has a tactile dot.*
C/X/x/c buttons (32)
DISPLAY button (13)
TOP MENU button (32)
TV [/1 (on/standby) button (55)
[/1 (on/standby) button (27)
PICTURE MODE button (49)
VOL (volume) +/– buttons (55)
The + button has a tactile dot.*
TV/VIDEO button (55)
SEARCH MODE button (40)
REPLAY button (28)
x STOP button (28)
ENTER button (25)
O RETURN button (32)
MENU button (32) (33)
* Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating
the player.
,continued
10
1-2
11
DVP-NS415
A TV [/1 (on/standby) button (55)
B Z OPEN/CLOSE button (28)
C Number buttons (32)
D
E
F
G
Guide to On-Screen
Displays (Control Bar)
The number 5 button has a tactile dot.*
CLEAR button (35)
SUBTITLE button (47)
AUDIO button (43)
./> PREV/NEXT (previous/
next) buttons (28)
H
m/M
SCAN/SLOW
buttons (29)
I X PAUSE button (28)
J H PLAY button (27)
K
L
M
N
O
The following explains the Control Bar. The
Control Bar is used for making adjustments to
the settings or displaying information during
playback.
The displayed contents differ according to the
type of disc being played. The numbers in
parentheses indicate reference pages.
Displaying the Control Bar during
playback
The H button has a tactile dot.*
C/X/x/c buttons (32)
DISPLAY button (13)
TOP MENU button (32)
[/1 (on/standby) button (27)
VOL (volume) +/– buttons (55)
The following displays appear when the
DISPLAY button is pressed repeatedly
during playback. You can select the setting
that suits the current playback item and view
the related information.
◆Display 1
The following play modes 1~4 can be set.
The indicator lights up in blue when activated.
Example: When Repeat Play is selected. (The
display will differ when A-B Repeat Play is
set.)
The + button has a tactile dot.*
P TV/VIDEO button (55)
Q ENTER button (performs the same
function as Z)
R PICTURE MODE button (49)
S ANGLE button (47)
T SUR (surround) button (44)
U TIME/TEXT button (41)
V REPEAT button (38)
W REPLAY button (28)
X SEARCH MODE button (40)
Y x STOP button (28)
Z ENTER button (25)
wj O RETURN button (32)
wk MENU button (32) (33)
CHAPTER
G
H
I
J
TVS (44)
“BNR” (48)
“CUSTOM PICTURE MODE” (49)
“DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER”
(50) (DVP-NS415 only)
m
◆Display 3
The following playback information is
displayed.
Example: When playing a DVD.
T41 – 8
K
L
M
N
T 1:01:57
TIME/TEXT icon
Title number of the DVD (40)
Chapter number of the DVD (40)
Playing time or remaining time (41)
m
◆Display 4 (DVD playback only)
A
B
C
D
E
F
* Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating
the player.
Repeat Play (38)
Shuffle Play (37)
Program Play (35)
A-B Repeat Play (39)
Unit being repeated in this example.
Playback status (NPlayback,
XPause, xStop, etc.)
m
◆Display 2
The following play modes 7~0 can be set.
The indicator lights up in blue when activated.
Example: When “TVS” is set.
DOLBY DIGITAL 3 / 2 .1
O Format of the current audio signal (43)
m
◆No display
m
◆Return to Display 1
,continued
12
Displaying the Control Bar in
stop mode
◆Display 3
Shows the same information as Display 2
during playback.
◆Display 1
The following settings can be made.
Simple Start Guide
Quick Overview
A quick overview presented in this guide will
give you enough information to start using the
player for your enjoyment. To use the
surround sound features of this player, refer
to “Hookups” on page 18.
m
◆Display 4
Shows the same information as Display 3
during playback.
A
B
• You cannot connect this player to a TV that does
not have a video input jack.
• Be sure to disconnect the power of each
component before connecting.
T 1:01:57
m
SETUP (57)
• Select QUICK to make the minimum
number of basic adjustments for using the
player.
• Select CUSTOM to make a full range of
adjustments.
• Select RESET to return the SETUP
adjustments to the default settings.
You can control the player using the supplied
remote. Insert two Size AA (R6) batteries by
matching the 3 and # ends on the batteries
to the markings inside the compartment.
When using the remote, point it at the remote
sensor
on the player.
Notes
QUICK
T41 – 8
Step 2: Inserting
Batteries into the
Remote
Simple Start Guide
The following displays appear when the
DISPLAY button is repeatedly pressed
during stop mode. You can make basic
adjustments and customize the player to suit
your viewing preferences.
13
Step 1: Unpacking
◆No display
m
Check that you have the following items:
• Audio/video cord (pinplug × 3 y pinplug
× 3) (1)
• Remote commander (remote) (1)
• Size AA (R6) batteries (2)
• A plug adapter is included with some
models.
◆Return to Display 1
PARENTAL CONTROL (51)
• Set this to limit the playback of selected
discs on this player.
m
◆Display 2
Shows the same information as Display 1
during playback.
Notes
• Do not leave the remote in an extremely hot or
humid place.
• Do not drop any foreign object into the remote
casing, particularly when replacing the batteries.
• Do not expose the remote sensor to direct light
from the sun or a lighting apparatus. Doing so
may cause a malfunction.
• If you do not use the remote for an extended
period of time, remove the batteries to avoid
possible damage from battery leakage and
corrosion.
CHAPTER
m
14
15
1-3
Step 3: TV Hookups
Step 4: Playing a Disc
Connect the supplied audio/video cord and the power cord in the order (1~3) shown below.
Be sure to connect the power cord last.
Simple Start Guide
If you are connecting to a VCR and your TV has
only one available input jack* (DVP-NS415 only)
to LINE IN
(VIDEO)
to LINE IN
L/R (AUDIO)
to video
output
to audio
output
LINE
IN
R-AUDIO-L
With the playback side facing down
VCR
VIDEO
IN
CD/DVD Player
OUT
OUT R-AUDIO-L
DIGITAL OUT
VIDEO
PCM/DTS/
DOLBY DIGITAL
COAXIAL OPTICAL
LINE
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
Y
to LINE OUT
(VIDEO)
to video input
3 Power source
TV
INPUT
E Place the disc on the tray with the
playback side facing down.
L
(supplied)
AUDIO
F Press H.
R
to audio input
* If you are connecting a VCR and your TV
has only one available input jack
(DVP-NS415 only)
If your TV has only one available input jack,
connect your VCR or similar device to the
LINE IN jacks on the player. In order to view
the pictures from your VCR, the DVD player
must be in standby mode. Note that the DVD
player will only pass signals through the
LINE jacks and will not output the VCR
signals from any other jack.
If your TV has more than one available input
jack, connect your VCR directly to your TV.
Depending on the disc, a menu may be
displayed on the TV screen. If so, select the
item you want from the menu and play the
DVD (page 32) or VIDEO CD disc (page 32).
D Press A on the player to open the
disc tray.
VIDEO
1 Audio/video cord
After Step 6
B Press [/1 on the player.
C Switch the input selector on your
TV so that the signal from the
player appears on the TV screen.
PB
PR
to LINE OUT
L/R (AUDIO)
A Turn on the TV.
To stop playing
Press x.
To remove the disc
Press A.
To turn off the player
Press [/1. The player enters standby mode
and the power indicator lights up in red.
The disc tray closes and the player begins
playing the disc.
2 Power source
When connecting to a wide screen TV
Depending on the disc, the image may not fit
your TV screen.
If you want to change the aspect ratio, please
refer to page 59.
When connecting to a monaural TV
Use a stereo-mono conversion cord (not
supplied). Connect the LINE OUT (VIDEO)
jack on the player to the TV’s video input
jack, and connect the LINE OUT L/R
(AUDIO) jacks to the TV’s audio input jack.
16
17
A If you are connecting to a video input jack
Hookups
Connect the yellow plug of the audio/video cord (supplied) to the yellow (video) jacks. You will
enjoy standard quality images.
Hooking Up the Player
Yellow (Video)
White (L)
Yellow (Video)
Red (R)
Red (R)
White (L)
Hookups
Follow Steps 1 to 4 to hook up and adjust the settings of the player.
Before you start, disconnect the power cords, check that you have all of the supplied accessories,
and insert the batteries into the remote (page 15).
Use the red and white plugs to connect to the audio input jacks (page 21). (Do this if you are
connecting to a TV only.)
Notes
• Plug cords securely to prevent unwanted noise.
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected.
B If you are connecting to an S VIDEO input jack
Connect an S VIDEO cord (not supplied). You will enjoy high quality images.
Step 1: Connecting the Video Cords
Connect this player to your TV monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver) using a video cord.
Select one of the patterns A through C, according to the input jack on your TV monitor,
projector, or AV amplifier (receiver).
A
C If you are connecting to a monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver)
having component video input jacks (Y, PB, PR)
Connect the component via the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks using a component video
cord (not supplied) or three video cords (not supplied) of the same kind and length. You will
enjoy accurate color reproduction and high quality images.
C
INPUT
VIDEO
(yellow) Audio/video cord
(supplied) Component video cord
(not supplied)
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Y
(green)
PB
(blue)
L
PR
AUDIO
R
Green
Blue
Blue
Red
Red
(red)
TV, projector or AV
amplifier (receiver)
TV, projector or AV
amplifier (receiver)
Green
Notes
• Connect the player directly to the TV. If you pass the player signals via the VCR, you may not receive a
clear image on the TV screen.
VCR
(yellow)
(green) (blue)
to LINE OUT (VIDEO)
DIGITAL OUT
PCM/DTS/
DOLBY DIGITAL
COAXIAL OPTICAL
LINE
IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
(red)
CD/DVD player
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
CD/DVD player
TV
Connect
directly
Y
PB
PR
OUT R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
• If your TV has only one available audio/video input jack, connect the VCR to the LINE IN jacks on the
player (DVP-NS415 only). In order to view the pictures from your VCR, the DVD player must be in
standby mode (page 16).
INPUT
S VIDEO
VCR
S VIDEO cord
(not supplied)
TV, projector or AV
amplifier (receiver)
CD/DVD player
TV
B
l : Signal flow
18
19
1-4
Connecting to your TV
A
Step 2: Connecting the Audio Cords
This connection will use your TV speakers for sound.
Refer to the chart below to select the connection that best suits your system. Be sure to also read
the instructions for the components you wish to connect.
CD/DVD player
DIGITAL OUT
LINE
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
Y
PB
Hookups
R-AUDIO-L
OUT R-AUDIO-L
IN
PCM/DTS/
DOLBY DIGITAL
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PR
Select a connection
Select one of the following connections,
A
through
D
.
A
Components to be connected
Connection
TV
A
(page 21)
Stereo amplifier (receiver)
(having L and R audio input jacks only, or having a digital input jack)
• 2 speakers
(front L and R)
B
(page 22)
MD deck/DAT deck
B
(page 22)
AV amplifier (receiver) with a Dolby* Surround (Pro Logic)
decoder
(having L and R audio input jacks only, or having a digital input jack)
• 3 speakers
(front L and R, and rear (monaural))
or
• 6 speakers
(front L and R, center, rear L and R, subwoofer)
C
(page 23)
AV amplifier (receiver) having a Dolby Digital or DTS** decoder
and a digital input jack
• 6 speakers
(front L and R, center, rear L and R, subwoofer)
D
LINE
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
IN
(yellow)*
(yellow)
(white)
(white)
(red)
Audio/video
cord (supplied)
to LINE OUT L/R
(AUDIO)
TV
(red)
to audio input
l : Signal flow
* The yellow plug is used for video signals (page
18).
◆Recommended surround sound effects for
this connection
• TVS DYNAMIC (page 45)
• TVS WIDE (page 45)
(page 24)
z Hint
When connecting to a monaural TV, use a stereomono conversion cord (not supplied). Connect the
LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) jacks to the TV’s audio
input jack.
* Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
** “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
,continued
20
C Connecting to an AV amplifier (receiver) having a Dolby Surround (Pro
Logic) decoder and 3 to 6 speakers
If the stereo amplifier (receiver) has audio input jacks L and R only, use B-1 . If the amplifier
(receiver) has a digital input jack, or when connecting to an MD deck or DAT deck, use B-2 .
In this case, you can also connect the player directly to the MD deck or DAT deck without using
your stereo amplifier (receiver).
You can enjoy the Dolby Surround effects only when playing Dolby Surround audio or multichannel audio (Dolby Digital) discs.
If your amplifier (receiver) has L and R audio input jacks only, use C-1 . If your amplifier
(receiver) has a digital input jack, use C-2 .
CD/DVD player
DIGITAL OUT
PCM/DTS/
DOLBY DIGITAL
COAXIAL OPTICAL
LINE
IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
CD/DVD player
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
Y
DIGITAL OUT
PB
PCM/DTS/
DOLBY DIGITAL
COAXIAL OPTICAL
LINE
IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
PR
OUT R-AUDIO-L
B-2
DIGITAL OUT
B-1
Coaxial digital
cord (not supplied)
C-2
DIGITAL OUT
Stereo audio cord
(not supplied) (white)
PCM/DTS/
DOLBY DIGITAL
COAXIAL OPTICAL
LINE
IN
R-AUDIO-L
Stereo
audio cord (not
supplied)
(white)
PCM/DTS/
DOLBY DIGITAL
COAXIAL OPTICAL
VIDEO
LINE
IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
or
(red)
OUT R-AUDIO-L
or
VIDEO
(red)
to DIGITAL OUT
(COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
to LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO)
Optical digital cord
(not supplied)
Remove jack cap
before connecting
(DVP-NS415 only)
C-1
Coaxial digital cord
(not supplied)
or
to DIGITAL OUT
(COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
(white)
Optical digital cord
(not supplied)
Remove jack cap
before connecting
(DVP-NS415 only)
(red)
to coaxial or optical
digital input
[Speakers]
Y
PB
PR
VIDEO
or
Hookups
B Connecting to a stereo amplifier (receiver) and 2 speakers/Connecting to
an MD deck or DAT deck
21
to audio input
to LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO)
(white)
(red)
to audio input
to coaxial or optical digital
input
[Speakers]
[Speakers]
Amplifier (receiver) with Dolby
Surround decoder
Stereo amplifier (receiver)
Front (L)
MD deck/DAT deck
Rear (L)
Front (L)
Rear (R)
Front (R)
Front (R)
l: Signal flow
l: Signal flow
◆Recommended surround sound effects for
the B-1 connection only
• TVS STANDARD (page 45)
z Hint
In connection B-1 , you can use the supplied
audio/video cord instead of using a separate audio
cord.
Subwoofer
Center
Rear (mono)
Note
Note
When connecting 6 speakers, replace the monaural
rear speaker with a center speaker, 2 rear speakers
and a subwoofer.
If you select one of the TVS effects (page 44) while
playing a disc, no sound will come from your
speakers with the B-2 connection.
,continued
22
1-5
23
D Connecting to an AV amplifier (receiver) with a digital input jack having
a Dolby Digital or DTS decoder and 6 speakers
Step 3: Connecting the Power Cord
This connection will allow you to use the Dolby Digital or DTS decoder function of your AV
amplifier (receiver). You are not able to enjoy the surround sound effects of this player.
Plug the player and TV power cords into an AC outlet.
DIGITAL OUT
LINE
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
IN
PCM/DTS/
DOLBY DIGITAL
COAXIAL OPTICAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
Hookups
CD/DVD player
Step 4: Quick Setup
Y
PB
PR
Follow the steps below to make the minimum number of basic adjustments for using the player.
To skip an adjustment, press >. To return to the previous adjustment, press ..
DVP-NS315
D
DVP-NS415
DIGITAL OUT
LANGUAGE SETUP
OSD:
MENU:
AUDIO:
SUBTITLE:
PCM/DTS/
DOLBY DIGITAL
COAXIAL OPTICAL
5 Press X/x to select a language.
to DIGITAL OUT
(COAXIAL or
OPTICAL)
The player uses the language selected
here to display the menu and subtitles as
well.
ENTER
or
Coaxial digital cord
(not supplied)
Rear (L)
6 Press ENTER.
Optical digital cord
(not supplied)
Remove jack cap
before connecting
(DVP-NS415 only)
to coaxial digital
input
[Speakers]
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
FRENCH
SPANISH
PORTUGUESE
1 Turn on the TV.
2 Press [/1.
3 Switch the input selector on your
to optical digital input
Subwoofer
Front (L)
Rear (R)
SCREEN SETUP
TV TYPE:
SCREEN SAVER:
BACKGROUND:
4:3 LETTER BOX
4:3 LETTER BOX
4:3 PAN SCAN
16:9
TV so that the signal from the
player appears on the TV screen.
[Speakers]
AV amplifier (receiver) having
a decoder
The Setup Display for selecting the
aspect ratio of the TV to be connected
appears.
“Press [ENTER] to run QUICK SETUP”
appears at the bottom of the screen. If this
message does not appear, select
“QUICK” under “SETUP” in the Control
Bar to run Quick Setup (page 58).
Center
4 Press ENTER without inserting a
Front (R)
l: Signal flow
disc.
Note
The Setup Display for selecting the
language used in the on-screen display
appears.
After you have completed the connection, be sure to
set “DOLBY DIGITAL” to “DOLBY DIGITAL”
and “DTS” to “ON” (page 25) in Quick Setup.
Otherwise, no sound or a loud noise will come from
the speakers.
7 Press X/x to select the setting that
matches your TV type.
◆ If you have a 4:3 standard TV
• 4:3 LETTER BOX or 4:3 PAN SCAN
(page 59)
◆ If you have a wide-screen TV or a 4:3
standard TV with a wide-screen mode
• 16:9 (page 59)
8 Press ENTER.
The Setup Display for selecting the type
of jack used to connect your amplifier
(receiver) appears.
,continued
24
4 Press A on the player, and place a
“DTS” is selected.
Is this player connected to an amplifier
(receiver) ? Select the type of jack you
are using.
AUDIO SETUP
AUDIO ATT:
OFF
AUDIO DRC:
STANDARD
DOWNMIX:
DOLBY SURROUND
DIGITAL OUT:
ON
D-PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL:
DTS:
OFF
OFF
ON
YES
LINE OUTPUT L/R (AUDIO)
DIGITAL OUTPUT
NO
9 Press X/x to select the type of jack
B-2
B-2
Choose the signal that matches the audio
connection you selected on pages 22 to
24 ( B through D ).
AUDIO SETUP
AUDIO ATT:
OFF
AUDIO DRC:
STANDARD
DOWNMIX:
DOLBY SURROUND
DIGITAL OUT:
ON
D-PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL:
D-PCM
DTS:
DOLBY DIGITAL
MODE CHANGE
(DVP-NS415 only)
DVP-NS315
B-2
C-2
D
• DOLBY DIGITAL (only if the
amplifier (receiver) has a Dolby Digital
decoder) (page 62)
Press [/1. The player enters standby mode.
Enjoying the surround sound
effects
AUDIO
To enjoy the surround sound effects of this
player or your amplifier (receiver), set the
following items as described below for the
audio connection you selected on pages 22 to
24 ( B through D ). Each of these is the
default setting and does not need to be adjusted
when you first connect the player. Refer to
page 57 for using the Setup Display.
1 Turn on your TV.
2 Press [/1.
A
The player turns on and the power
indicator lights up in green.
11Press ENTER.
C-1
3 Switch the input selector on your
• Set “DOWNMIX” to “DOLBY
SURROUND” (page 61)
• If the sound distorts even when the volume
is turned down, set “AUDIO ATT” to “ON”
(page 61)
C-2
z Hint
You can have the player turn off automatically
whenever you leave it in stop mode for more than
30 minutes. To turn on this function, set “AUTO
POWER OFF” in “CUSTOM SETUP” to “ON”
(page 60).
Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a CD
Audio Connection (pages 21 to 24)
B-2
The disc tray closes, and the player starts
playback (continuous play). Adjust the
volume on the TV or the amplifier
(receiver).
Depending on the disc, a menu may
appear on the TV screen. For DVDs, see
page 32. For VIDEO CDs, see page 32.
To turn off the player
Quick Setup is finished. All connections
and setup operations are complete.
B-1
With the playback side facing down
5 Press H.
DVP-NS415
13Press ENTER.
• No additional settings are needed.
• D-PCM (page 62)
H/Playback Dial
C-2
• ON (only if the amplifier (receiver) has
a DTS decoder) (page 62)
• Select “DIGITAL OUTPUT.” The Setup
Display for “DOLBY DIGITAL” appears.
Dolby Digital signal you wish to
send to your amplifier (receiver).
A
D
D
10Press X/x to select the type of
Power
[/1 indicator
• OFF (page 62)
C-1
C-2
Refer to the operating instructions supplied
with your disc.
Choose the item that matches the audio
connection you selected on pages 22 to
24 ( B through D ).
A
• Select “LINE OUTPUT L/R
(AUDIO).” Quick Setup is finished and
connections are complete.
Depending on the DVD or VIDEO CD, some
operations may be different or restricted.
not you wish to send a DTS signal
to your amplifier (receiver).
• If you connect just a TV and nothing
else, select “NO.” Quick Setup is
finished and connections are complete.
B-1
Playing Discs
12Press X/x to select whether or
Choose the item that matches the audio
connection you selected on pages 21 to
24 ( A through D ).
disc on the disc tray.
Playing Discs
Playing Discs
(if any) you are using to connect to
an amplifier (receiver), then press
ENTER.
25
TV so that the signal from the
player appears on the TV screen.
◆ When using an amplifier (receiver)
Turn on the amplifier (receiver) and
select the appropriate channel so that you
can hear sound from the player.
D
• Set “DOWNMIX” to “DOLBY
SURROUND” (page 61)
• Set “DIGITAL OUT” to “ON” (page 61)
• When playing DTS-encoded CDs,
excessive noise will be heard from the
analog stereo jacks. To avoid possible
damage to the audio system, the consumer
should take proper precautions when the
analog stereo jacks of the player are
connected to an amplification system. To
enjoy DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an
external 5.1-channel decoder system must
be connected to the digital jack of the
player.
• Set the sound to “STEREO” using the
AUDIO button when you play DTS sound
tracks on a CD (page 43).
• Do not play DTS sound tracks without first
connecting the player to an audio
component having a built-in DTS decoder.
The player outputs the DTS signal via the
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
jack even if “DTS” in “AUDIO SETUP” is
set to “OFF” in the Setup Display (page 62),
,continued
26
1-6
27
and may affect your ears or cause your
speakers to be damaged.
Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound
track
Additional operations
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS415
Operation
Replay the previous
scene (DVD only)
Press REPLAY
Note
Even if you select “RESET” under “SETUP” in the
Control Bar (page 58), the disc tray remains locked.
* Operable when the MODE CHANGE indicator
lights up in green or turns off. For more details
about the Multi-mode Playback Dial, see page 30
(DVP-NS415 only).
Searching for a
Particular Point on a
Disc (Scan, Slow-motion Play,
Search, Freeze Frame)
z Hint
The Replay function is useful when you want to
review a scene or dialog that you missed.
You can quickly locate a particular point on a
disc by monitoring the picture or playing back
slowly.
Note
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS415
Playing Discs
• DTS audio signals are output only through
the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or
OPTICAL) jack.
• When you play a DVD with DTS sound
tracks, set “DTS” to “ON” in “AUDIO
SETUP” (page 62).
• If you connect the player to audio
equipment without a DTS decoder, do not
set “DTS” to “ON” in “AUDIO SETUP”
(page 62). A loud noise may come out from
the speakers, affecting your ears or causing
the speakers to be damaged.
To
You may not be able to use the Replay function with
some scenes.
Locking the disc tray (Child
Lock)
You can lock the disc tray to prevent children
from opening it.
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS415
REPLAY
Playback Dial (DVP-NS315)
Multi-mode Playback Dial (DVP-NS415)
ENTER
MODE CHANGE
(DVP-NS415 only)
To
Operation
Stop
Press x
Pause
Press X
Resume play after
pause
Press X or H
Go to the next chapter, Press > on the
track, or scene in
remote, or briefly turn
continuous play mode the Playback Dial* on
the player clockwise
Go back to the
previous chapter,
track, or scene in
continuous play mode
Press . on the
remote, or briefly turn
the Playback Dial* on
the player
counterclockwise
Stop play and remove Press Z
the disc
RETURN
Note
Depending on the DVD/VIDEO CD, you may not
be able to do some of the operations described.
When the player is in standby mode, press
O RETURN, ENTER, and then [/1 on the
remote.
Locating a point quickly by
playing a disc in fast forward or
fast reverse (Scan)
The player turns on and “LOCKED” appears
on the front panel display.
The Z button on the player or the remote does
not work while the Child Lock is set.
Press
m or M
while playing a
disc. When you find the point you want, press
H to return to normal speed. Each time you
press
m or M
during scan, the
playback speed changes. Three speeds are
available. With each press the indication
changes as follows:
To unlock the disc tray
When the player is in standby mode, press
O RETURN, ENTER, and then [/1 again.
,continued
28
Playback direction
× 2B (DVD/CD only) t 1M t 2M
Opposite direction
× 2b (DVD only) t 1m t 2m
Watching frame by frame (Slowmotion play)
Press
m or M
when the player is
in pause mode. To return to the normal speed,
press H.
Each time you press
m or M
during Slow-motion play, the playback speed
changes. Two speeds are available. With each
press the indication changes as follows:
Playback direction
2
y1
Opposite direction (DVD only)
2
y1
The “2 y”/“2
than “1 y”/“1
Resuming Playback from
the Point Where You
Stopped the Disc (Resume
You can search for a particular point on a disc
in various ways using the MODE CHANGE
button.
Play/Multi-disc Resume)
To go to the next chapter/track/scene
The player remembers the point where you
stopped the disc.
During playback and with the MODE
CHANGE indicator turned off, briefly turn
the Multi-mode Playback Dial clockwise to
skip to the next chapter/track/scene, or
counterclockwise to skip to the previous
ones. (The same operation can be made when
the MODE CHANGE indicator lights up in
green.)
DVP-NS315
Storing the point where you
stopped the disc (Multi-disc
Resume) (DVP-NS415 only)
To locate a point quickly (Search)
During playback and with the MODE
CHANGE indicator turned off, turn and hold
the Multi-mode Playback Dial clockwise to
locate a point in the playback direction,
counterclockwise to locate a point in the
opposite direction. When you find the point
you want, release the dial to return to normal
playback speed.
Resuming playback for the
current disc (Resume Play)
To locate a specific title/chapter/track
” playback speed is slower
.”
Using the Playback Dial on the
player (DVP-NS315 only)
You can search for a particular point on a disc
in various ways using the Playback Dial.
To go to the next chapter/track/scene
During playback, briefly turn the Playback
Dial clockwise to skip to the next chapter/
track/scene, or counterclockwise to skip to
the previous ones.
To locate a point quickly (Search)
During playback, turn and hold the Playback
Dial clockwise to locate a point in the
playback direction, or counterclockwise to
locate a point in the opposite direction. When
you find the point you want, release the dial to
return to normal playback speed.
DVP-NS415
1
Press MODE CHANGE repeatedly so
that the indicator lights up in green.
2
During playback, turn and hold the
Multi-mode Playback Dial clockwise to
locate succeeding titles/chapters/tracks,
or counterclockwise to locate preceding
ones.
The player remembers the point where you
stopped the disc even if the player enters
standby mode by pressing [/1.
1
Press MODE CHANGE repeatedly so
that the indicator lights up in amber.
2
During playback, turn the Multi-mode
Playback Dial clockwise to go to the next
frame, or counterclockwise to go to the
previous frame. If you turn and hold the
dial, you can view the frames in
succession.
While playing a disc, press x to stop
playback.
“RESUME” appears on the front panel
display.
To play one frame at a time (Freeze
Frame)
1
Notes
• The point where you stopped playing is cleared
when:
– you change the play mode.
– you change the settings on the Setup Display.
– you open the disc tray (DVP-NS315 only).
– you disconnect the power cord.
• When playing a CD, the point where you stopped
is cleared when the disc tray is opened or the
power cord is disconnected.
• When playing a DATA CD, the point where you
stopped playing is cleared when the player enters
standby mode, the disc tray is opened, or the
power cord is disconnected.
• This function may not work with some discs.
Playing Discs
The “× 2B”/“× 2b” playback speed is about
twice the normal speed. The “2M”/“2m”
playback speed is faster than “1M”/
“1m.”
Using the Multi-mode Playback
Dial on the player (DVP-NS415
only)
29
2
Press H.
The player starts playback from the point
where you stopped the disc in Step 1.
z Hint
To play from the beginning of the disc, press x
twice, then press H.
30
The player stores the point where you stopped
the disc and resumes playback from the same
point the next time you insert the same disc.
Resume playback points for up to 6 different
DVD/VIDEO discs remain in memory even if
you disconnect the power cord. When you
store a resume playback point for the seventh
disc, the resume playback point for the first
disc is deleted.
z Hints
• To play from the beginning of the disc, press x
twice, then press H.
• To turn off the Multi-disc Resume function, set
“MULTI-DISC RESUME” in “CUSTOM
SETUP” to “OFF” (page 60). Playback restarts at
the resume point only for the current disc in the
player.
Notes
• The point where you stopped playing is cleared
when:
– you change the play mode.
– you change the settings on the Setup Display.
• This function may not work with some discs.
31
1-7
To return to the menu
Using the DVD’s Menu
DVP-NS315
Press O RETURN.
z Hint
To play without using PBC, press ./> while
the player is stopped to select a track, then press H
or ENTER.
“Play without PBC” appears on the TV screen and
the player starts continuous play. You cannot play
still pictures such as a menu.
To return to PBC playback, press x twice then
press H.
PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play
VIDEO CDs interactively by following the
menu on the TV screen.
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS415
Playing an MP3 Audio
Track
You can play back DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/
CD-Rs/CD-RWs) recorded in MP3 (MPEG1
Audio Layer 3) format.
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS415
Note
DVP-NS415
Playing Discs
A DVD is divided into long sections of a
picture or a music feature called “titles.”
When you play a DVD which contains
several titles, you can select the title you want
using the TOP MENU button.
When you play DVDs that allow you to select
items such as the language for the subtitles
and the language for the sound, select these
items using the MENU button.
Playing VIDEO CDs with
PBC Functions (PBC Playback)
Depending on the VIDEO CD, “Press ENTER” in
Step 3 may appear as “Press SELECT” in the
instructions supplied with the disc. In this case,
press H.
Number
buttons
Number
buttons
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
MENU
ENTER
RETURN
MENU
TOP MENU
1 Press Z and place a DATA CD on
1 Start playing a VIDEO CD with PBC
the disc tray.
functions.
1 Press TOP MENU or MENU.
The disc’s menu appears on the TV
screen.
The contents of the menu vary from disc
to disc.
2 Press C/X/x/c to select the item
you want to play or change.
You can also use the number buttons to
select the item. (DVP-NS415 only)
3 Press ENTER.
2 Press H.
The menu for your selection appears.
The disc tray closes, and the player starts
to play the first MP3 audio track in the
first album on the disc.
2 Select the item number you want
by pressing X/x.
You can also use the number buttons to
select the item number and track. (DVPNS415 only)
Notes
• This player can play MP3 audio tracks recorded in
the following sampling frequencies: 32kHz,
44.1kHz, 48kHz.
• The playback order may be different from the
edited order. See “The Playback order of MP3
audio tracks” below for details.
3 Press ENTER.
4 Follow the instructions in the
menu for interactive operations.
Selecting an album and track
Refer to the instructions supplied with the
disc, as the operating procedure may
differ depending on the VIDEO CD.
1
Press MENU.
The list of MP3 albums recorded on the
DATA CD appears.
,continued
32
1( 30)
ROCK BEST HIT
KARAOKE
JAZZ
R&B
MY FAVORITE SONGS
CLASSICAL
SALSA OF CUBA
BOSSANOVA
Select an album using X/x and press
ENTER.
The list of tracks contained in the album
appears.
JAZZ
1(90)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SHE IS SPECIAL
ALL YOU NEED IS ...
SPICY LIFE
HAPPY HOUR
RIVER SIDE
5
TAKE TIME,TAKE TIME
Select a track using X/x and press
ENTER.
The selected track starts playing.
When a track or album is being played, its
title is shaded.
To play a Multi Session CD
This player can play Multi Session CDs when
an MP3 audio track is located in the first
session. Any subsequent MP3 audio tracks,
recorded in the later sessions, can also be
played back.
When audio tracks and images in music CD
format or video CD format are recorded in the
first session, only the first session will be
played back.
• If you put the extension “.MP3” to data not in
MP3 format, the player cannot recognize the data
properly and will generate a loud noise which
could damage your speaker system.
• The player cannot play audio tracks in MP3PRO
format.
Notes
• Depending on the software you use to create the
DATA CD, the playback order may differ from
the illustration above.
• The playback order above may not be applicable
if there are more than a total of 200 albums and
tracks in the DATA CD.
• The player can recognize up to 100 albums (the
player will count just albums, including albums
that do not contain MP3 audio tracks). The player
will not play any albums beyond the first 100
albums. Of the first 100 albums, the player will
play no more than a combined total of 200 albums
and tracks.
The Playback order of MP3 audio tracks
The playback order of albums and tracks
recorded on a DATA CD is as follows.
◆Structure of disc contents
Tree 1
To go to the next or previous page
z Hints
• If you add numbers (01, 02, 03, etc.) to the front
of the track file names, the tracks will be played in
that order.
• Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start
playback, place your albums within the first two
trees.
Notes
Tree 2
Tree 3
Tree 4
Tree 5
ROOT
Press c or C.
To return to the previous display
Press O RETURN.
Various Play Mode
Functions (Program Play,
Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, A-B Repeat
Play)
You can set the following play modes:
• Program Play (page 35)
• Shuffle Play (page 37)
• Repeat Play (page 38)
• A-B Repeat Play (page 39)
Playing Discs
2
When you insert a DATA CD and press H,
the numbered tracks are played sequentially,
from 1 through 7. Any sub-albums/tracks
contained within a currently selected album
take priority over the next album in the same
tree. (Example: C contains D so 4 is played
before 5.)
When you press MENU and the list of MP3
albums appears (page 33), the albums are
arranged in the following order: A t B t
C t D t F t G. Albums that do not
contain tracks (such as album E) do not
appear in the list.
See the instructions of the CD-R/RW device
or recording software (not supplied) for
details on the recording format.
33
Note
The play mode is canceled when:
– you open the disc tray.
– the player enters standby mode by pressing [/1.
Creating your own program
(Program Play)
You can play the contents of a disc in the
order you want by arranging the order of the
titles, chapters, or tracks on the disc to create
your own program. You can program up to 99
titles, chapters, and tracks.
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS415
Number
buttons
CLEAR
To turn off the display
Press MENU.
Notes
ENTER
• Only the letters in the alphabet and numbers can
be used for album or track names. Anything else
is displayed as an asterisk.
• ID3 tags cannot be displayed.
DISPLAY
About MP3 audio tracks
You can play MP3 audio tracks on CDROMs, CD-Rs, or CD-RWs. However, the
discs must be recorded according to ISO9660
level 1, level 2, or Joliet format for the player
to recognize the tracks.
You can also play discs recorded in Multi
Session.
album
track
,continued
34
1-8
35
1
Press DISPLAY twice while the player
is in stop mode.
ALL CLEAR
1. TITLE – –
2. TITLE – –
3. TITLE – –
4. TITLE – –
5. TITLE – –
6. TITLE – –
7. TITLE – –
“TRACK” is displayed when you play
a VIDEO CD or CD.
PROGRAM
––
01
02
03
04
05
Titles or tracks
recorded on a disc
3
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the display
is turned off.
––
01
02
03
04
05
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD or CD
For example, select track “02.”
Press X/x to select “02” under “T,” then
press ENTER.
The cursor moves to the title or track row
“T” (in this case, “01”).
T
C
––
01
02
03
04
05
ALL
01
02
03
04
05
06
0:15:30
T
PROGRAM
ALL CLEAR
1. TRACK
2. TRACK
3. TRACK
4. TRACK
5. TRACK
6. TRACK
7. TRACK
02
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
01
02
03
04
05
◆ When playing a DVD
For example, select chapter “03” of title
“02.”
Press X/x to select “02” under “T,” then
press ENTER. You can also use the
number buttons to select the number
(DVP-NS415 only).
5
Select the program number of the title,
chapter, or track you want to change or
cancel using X/x, and press c. You can
also use the number buttons to select the
number (DVP-NS415 only).
3
Follow Step 4 for new programming. To
cancel a program, select “--” under “T,”
then press ENTER.
1
Follow Steps 1 and 2 of “Creating your
own program (Program Play).”
2
3
Press X and select “ALL CLEAR.”
Press ENTER.
You can have the player “shuffle” titles,
chapters, or tracks. Subsequent “shuffling”
may produce a different playing order.
Total time of the programmed tracks
Select the title, chapter, or track you
want to program.
2
Playing in random order (Shuffle
Play)
Chapters recorded on a disc
4
Follow Steps 1 and 2 of “Creating your
own program (Program Play).”
z Hint
You can do Repeat Play or Shuffle Play of the
programmed titles, chapters, or tracks. During
Program Play, follow the steps of “Repeat Play”
(page 38) or “Shuffle Play” (page 37).
Selected track
PROGRAM
ALL CLEAR
1. TITLE – –
2. TITLE – –
3. TITLE – –
4. TITLE – –
5. TITLE – –
6. TITLE – –
7. TITLE – –
1
To cancel all the titles, chapters, or tracks
in the programmed order
Selected title and chapter
Press c.
Press DISPLAY during playback.
The following Control Bar appears.
To change or cancel a program
T
ALL CLEAR
1. TITLE 0 2 – 0 3
2. TITLE – –
3. TITLE – –
4. TITLE – –
5. TITLE – –
6. TITLE – –
7. TITLE – –
T
ALL CLEAR
1. TITLE
2. TITLE – –
3. TITLE – –
4. TITLE – –
5. TITLE – –
6. TITLE – –
7. TITLE – –
C
ALL
01
02
03
04
05
06
Next, press X/x to select “03” under “C,”
then press ENTER. You can also use the
number buttons to select the number
(DVP-NS415 only).
Press C/c to select
(PROGRAM), then press ENTER.
PROGRAM
T
––
01
02
03
04
05
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS415
To program other titles, chapters, or
tracks, repeat Steps 3 to 4.
2
Press C/c to select
(SHUFFLE),
then press ENTER repeatedly to select
the item to be shuffled.
TITLE
Playing Discs
2
1
To turn off the display
PROGRAM
The following Control Bar appears.
◆ When playing a DVD
• TITLE
• CHAPTER
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD or CD
• TRACK
◆ When Program Play is activated
• ON: shuffles titles, chapters, or tracks
selected in Program Play.
To return to normal play
Press CLEAR, or select “OFF” in Step 2.
To turn off the Control Bar
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control
Bar is turned off.
z Hints
• You can set Shuffle Play while the player is
stopped. After selecting the “SHUFFLE” option,
press H. Shuffle Play starts.
• Up to 200 chapters in a disc can be played in
random order when “CHAPTER” is selected.
The programmed titles, chapters, and
tracks are displayed in the selected order.
6
Press H to start Program Play.
CLEAR
Program Play begins.
When the program ends, you can restart
the same program again by pressing H.
ENTER
To stop Program Play
Press CLEAR.
DISPLAY
,continued
36
Playing repeatedly (Repeat Play)
You can play all of the titles or tracks on a
disc or a single title, chapter, or track
repeatedly.
You can use a combination of Shuffle or
Program Play modes.
DVP-NS415
Repeating a specific portion (AB Repeat Play)
You can play a specific portion of a title,
chapter or track repeatedly. (This function is
useful when you want to memorize lyrics, etc.)
DVP-NS315
◆ When Program Play or Shuffle Play is
activated
• ON: repeats Program Play or Shuffle
Play.
REPEAT
To turn off the Control Bar
ENTER
DISPLAY
1
Press DISPLAY during playback.
DVP-NS415
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control
Bar is turned off.
Note
When you set A-B Repeat Play, the settings for
Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, and Program Play are
canceled.
CLEAR
To return to normal play
Press CLEAR, or select “OFF” in Step 2.
Press CLEAR.
To turn off the Control Bar
◆ When playing a DATA CD (MP3 audio)
• DISC: repeats all of the albums.
• ALBUM: repeats the current album.
• TRACK: repeats the current track.
CLEAR
To return to normal play
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control
Bar is turned off.
ENTER
z Hints
• You can set Repeat Play while the player is
stopped. After selecting the “REPEAT” option,
press H. Repeat Play starts.
• You can select “REPEAT” directly by pressing
REPEAT (DVP-NS415 only).
DISPLAY
1
Playing Discs
DVP-NS315
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD or CD
• DISC: repeats all of the tracks.
• TRACK: repeats the current track.
37
Press DISPLAY during playback.
The following Control Bar appears.
The following Control Bar appears.
2
2
Press C/c to select
(REPEAT),
then press ENTER repeatedly to select
the item to be repeated.
3
Press C/c to select
REPEAT).
(A-B
During playback, when you find the
starting point (point A) of the portion to
be played repeatedly, press ENTER.
The starting point (point A) is set.
CHAPTER
A13 – 0:27:34 B
◆ When playing a DVD
• DISC: repeats all of the titles.
• TITLE: repeats the current title on a
disc.
• CHAPTER: repeats the current
chapter.
4
When you reach the ending point
(point B), press ENTER again.
The set points are displayed and the
player starts repeating this specific
portion.
38
39
1-9
Searching for a Scene
Searching for a Title/
Chapter/Track/Index/
Scene (Search mode)
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS415
Number
buttons
CLEAR
SEARCH
MODE
ENTER
Viewing Information About the
Disc
Checking the Playing
Time and Remaining
Time
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD
(TRACK) or
(INDEX)
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD with PBC
Playback
(SCENE)
◆ When playing a CD
(TRACK) or
You can check the playing time and
remaining time of the current title, chapter, or
track. Also, you can check the DVD/CD text
or track name (MP3 audio) recorded on the
disc.
(INDEX)
◆ When playing a DATA CD (MP3 audio)
(ALBUM) or
(TRACK)
3 Select the number of the title,
DVP-NS315
track, scene, time code, etc. you
want by pressing X/x to select the
digit, followed by C/c to move the
cursor.
For example, to find the scene at 2 hours,
10 minutes, and 20 seconds after the
beginning, select “TIME/TEXT” in Step
2 and enter “2:10:20.” You can also use
the number buttons to select the number
(DVP-NS415 only).
– –(10)
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD (without
PBC functions) or CD
• T **:**
Playing time of the current track
• T–**:**
Remaining time of the current track
• D **:**
Playing time of the current disc
• D –**:**
Remaining time of the current disc
To turn off the Control Bar
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control
Bar is turned off.
ENTER
DISPLAY
If you make a mistake
1 Press DISPLAY repeatedly during
4 Press ENTER.
The following display appears.
“-- (**)” appears next to the icon (**
refers to a number).
The number in parentheses indicates the
total number of titles, tracks, indexes,
scenes, etc. of the disc.
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD (with PBC
functions)
• **:**
Playing time of the current scene
◆ When playing a DATA CD (MP3 audio)
• ****:**
Playing time of the current track
TIME/TEXT
Cancel the number by pressing CLEAR,
then select another number.
1 Press SEARCH MODE.
DVP-NS415
• T–**:**:**
Remaining time of the current title
• C **:**:**
Playing time of the current chapter
• C–**:**:**
Remaining time of the current chapter
playback until
appears.
The player starts playback from the
selected number.
(TIME/TEXT)
Title, track (CD/VIDEO CD), scene, or
album number
z Hints
• If you are playing a disc and it is necessary to
enter a number, select “NUMBER INPUT” in
Step 2.
• When the display is turned off, you can search for
a chapter (DVD) or track (CD) by pressing the
number buttons and ENTER (DVP-NS415 only).
T41 – 8
To check the DVD/CD text or track name
(MP3 audio)
Press ENTER repeatedly in Step 2 to display
text recorded on the DVD/CD/DATA CD.
The DVD/CD text appears only when text is
recorded in the disc. You cannot change the
text. If the disc does not contain text, “NO
TEXT” appears.
For DATA CDs, only the track name of the
MP3 audio track appears.
T 1:01:57
BRAHMS SYMPHONY
Chapter, index, or
track (DATA CD)
Time
information
2 Press ENTER repeatedly to change
the time information.
The display and the kinds of time that you
can change depend on the disc you are
playing.
2 Press SEARCH MODE repeatedly
to select the search method.
◆ When playing a DVD
• T **:**:**
Playing time of the current title
◆ When playing a DVD
Checking the information on the
front panel display
You can view the time information and text
displayed on the TV screen also on the front
panel display. The information on the front
panel display changes as follows when you
,continued
40
change the time information on your TV
screen.
When playing a DVD
the desired audio signal.
Sound Adjustments
Playing time and number of the
current track
Changing the Sound
Remaining time of the current
track
Playing time of the disc
Playing time of the current chapter
Remaining time of the disc
Remaining time of the current
chapter
Text
Text
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS415
(returns to top automatically)
Track name
◆ When playing a VIDEO CD, CD, or
DATA CD (MP3 audio)
The default setting is underlined.
• STEREO: The standard stereo sound
• 1/L: The sound of the left channel
(monaural)
• 2/R: The sound of the right channel
(monaural)
Checking the audio signal
format
If you press DISPLAY repeatedly during
playback, the format of the current audio
signal (Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM, etc.)
appears as shown below.
Current track and index number
Current title and chapter number
Playing time and number of the current track
◆ When playing a DVD
Depending on the DVD, the choice of
language varies.
When 4 digits are displayed, they
indicate a language code. Refer to
“Language Code List” on page 68 to see
which language the code represents.
When the same language is displayed two
or more times, the DVD is recorded in
multiple audio formats.
Sound Adjustments
When playing a DVD recorded in multiple
audio formats (PCM, Dolby Digital, or DTS),
you can change the audio format. If the DVD
is recorded with multilingual tracks, you can
also change the language.
With CDs, DATA CDs, or VIDEO CDs, you
can select the sound from the right or left
channel and listen to the sound of the selected
channel through both the right and left
speakers. For example, when playing a disc
containing a song with the vocals on the right
channel and the instruments on the left
channel, you can hear the instruments from
both speakers by selecting the left channel.
Remaining time of the current title
When playing a DATA CD (MP3 audio)
41
2 Press AUDIO repeatedly to select
When playing a VIDEO CD (without PBC
functions) or CD
Playing time of the current title
(returns to top automatically)
Viewing Information About the Disc
You can search a DVD by title or chapter, and
you can search a VIDEO CD/CD by track,
index, or scene. As titles and tracks are
assigned unique numbers on the disc, you can
select the desired one by entering its number.
Or, you can search for a scene using the time
code.
(TITLE),
(CHAPTER),
(TIME/TEXT), or
(NUMBER
INPUT)
Select “TIME/TEXT” to search for a
starting point by inputting the time code.
AUDIO
z Hints
• When playing VIDEO CDs with PBC functions,
the scene number or the playing time are
displayed.
• Long text that does not fit in a single line will
scroll across the front panel display.
• You can also check the time information and text
by pressing TIME/TEXT repeatedly (DVPNS415 only).
Example:
Dolby Digital 5.1 ch
Rear (L/R)
DOLBY DIGITAL
3 / 2 .1
DISPLAY
1 Press AUDIO during playback.
Notes
The following display appears.
The number in parentheses indicates the
total number of available audio signals.
• Depending on the type of disc being played, the
DVD/CD text or track name may not be
displayed.
• The player can only display the first level of the
DVD/CD text, such as the disc name or title.
• Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be
displayed correctly.
1(4):ENGLISH
Front (L/R)
+ Center
LFE (Low Frequency
Effect)
About audio signals
Audio signals recorded in a disc contain the
sound elements (channels) shown below.
Each channel is output from a separate
speaker.
• Front (L)
• Front (R)
• Center
• Rear (L)
• Rear (R)
• Rear (Monaural): This signal can be either
the Dolby Surround Sound processed
signals or the Dolby Digital sound’s
monaural rear audio signals.
,continued
42
1-10
43
2 Press C/c to select
• LFE (Low Frequency Effect) signal
Note
If “DTS” is set to “OFF” in “AUDIO SETUP,” the
DTS track selection option will not appear on the
screen even if the disc contains DTS tracks (page
62).
TV Virtual Surround
Settings (TVS)
Refer to the following explanations given
for each item.
• TVS DYNAMIC
• TVS WIDE
• TVS NIGHT
• TVS STANDARD
TVS DYNAMIC
To cancel the setting
Select “OFF” in Step 2.
To turn off the Control Bar
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control
Bar is turned off.
DVP-NS415
◆TVS NIGHT
Large sounds, such as explosions, are
suppressed, but the quieter sounds are
unaffected. This feature is useful when you
want to hear the dialog and enjoy the
surround sound effects of “TVS WIDE” at
low volume.
◆TVS STANDARD
Creates virtual rear speakers from the sound
of the front speakers (L, R) without using
actual rear speakers. The virtual speakers are
reproduced as shown in the illustration
below. Use this setting when you want to use
TVS with 2 separate speakers.
L
Sound Adjustments
When you connect a stereo TV or 2 front
speakers, TVS (TV Virtual Surround) lets
you enjoy surround sound effects by using
sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers
from the sound of the front speakers (L: left,
R: right) without using actual rear speakers.
TVS was developed by Sony to produce
surround sound for home use using just a
stereo TV.
This function is designed to work with the
LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) jacks.
Note that if you select one of the TVS
settings, the player does not output Dolby
Digital signals from the DIGITAL OUT
(OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack. (when you
set “DOLBY DIGITAL” in “AUDIO
SETUP” to “D-PCM”) (page 62)
DVP-NS315
TV
(SURROUND), then press ENTER
repeatedly to select one of the TVS
sounds.
R
◆TVS DYNAMIC
Creates virtual rear speakers from the sound
of the front speakers (L, R) without using
actual rear speakers (shown below).
This mode is effective when the distance
between the front L and R speakers is short,
such as with built-in speakers on a stereo TV.
SUR
ENTER
TV
L: Front speaker (left)
R: Front speaker (right)
: Virtual speaker
DISPLAY
1 Press DISPLAY twice during
◆TVS WIDE
Creates virtual rear speakers from the sound
of the front speakers (L, R) without using
actual rear speakers. The virtual speakers are
reproduced as shown in the illustration
below.
This mode is effective when the distance
between the front L and R speakers is short,
such as with built-in speakers on a stereo TV.
playback.
The following Control Bar appears.
z Hint
You can also change the setting by pressing SUR
(or SURROUND on the player) repeatedly.
Notes
• When the playing signal does not contain a signal
for the rear speakers, the surround effects will be
difficult to hear.
• When you select one of the TVS modes, turn off
the surround setting of the connected TV or
amplifier (receiver).
• Make sure that your listening position is between
and at an equal distance from your speakers, and
that the speakers are located in similar
surroundings.
,continued
44
• “TVS NIGHT” only works with Dolby Digital
discs. However, not all discs will respond to the
“TVS NIGHT” function in the same way.
• If you use the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or
COAXIAL) jack and set “DOLBY DIGITAL” to
“DOLBY DIGITAL” or “DTS” to “ON” in
“AUDIO SETUP,” sound will come from your
speakers but it will not have the TVS effect.
Displaying the Subtitles
Enjoying Movies
Changing the Angles
If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene
are recorded on the DVD, “ ” appears in the
front panel display. This means that you can
change the viewing angle.
DVP-NS315
45
If subtitles are recorded on the discs, you can
change the subtitles or turn them on and off
whenever you want while playing a DVD.
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS415
DVP-NS415
SUBTITLE
ANGLE
1 Press ANGLE during playback.
The number of the angle appears on the
display.
The number in parentheses indicates the
total number of angles.
2(7)
The following display appears.
The number in parentheses indicates the
total number of available subtitles.
1(8):ENGLISH
Enjoying Movies
1 Press SUBTITLE during playback.
2 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to
select the language.
2 Press ANGLE repeatedly to select
the angle number.
The scene changes to the selected angle.
Depending on the DVD, the choice of
language varies.
When 4 digits are displayed, they
indicate a language code. Refer to
“Language Code List” on page 68 to see
which language the code represents.
Note
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to
change the angles even if multi-angles are recorded
on the DVD.
To turn off the subtitles
Select “OFF” in Step 2.
Note
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to
change the subtitles even if multilingual subtitles
are recorded on it. You also may not be able to turn
them off.
46
47
1-11
To cancel the “BNR” setting
Adjusting the Picture
Quality (BNR)
The Block Noise Reduction (BNR) function
adjusts the picture quality by reducing the
“block noise” or mosaic like patterns that
appear on your TV screen.
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS415
• DYNAMIC 1: produces a bold
dynamic picture by increasing the
picture contrast and the color intensity.
• DYNAMIC 2: produces a more
dynamic picture than DYNAMIC 1 by
further increasing the picture contrast
and the color intensity.
• CINEMA 1: enhances details in dark
areas by increasing the black level.
• CINEMA 2: White colors become
brighter and black colors become
richer, and the color contrast is
increased.
Adjusting the Playback
Picture (CUSTOM PICTURE MODE)
Select “OFF” in Step 2.
To turn off the Control Bar
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control
Bar is turned off.
You can adjust the video signal of the DVD or
VIDEO CD from the player to obtain the
picture quality you want. Choose the setting
that best suits the program you are watching.
Notes
• If the outlines of the images on your screen should
become blurred, set “BNR” to “OFF.”
• Depending on the disc or the scene being played,
the “BNR” effect may be hard to discern.
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS415
To turn off the Control Bar
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control
Bar is turned off.
PICTURE
MODE
ENTER
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
1 Press DISPLAY twice during
Enjoying Movies
z Hints
• When you watch a movie, “CINEMA 1” or
“CINEMA 2” is recommended.
• You can also select the “CUSTOM PICTURE
MODE” setting by pressing PICTURE MODE
repeatedly.
ENTER
1 Press DISPLAY twice during
playback.
The following Control Bar appears.
playback.
The following Control Bar appears.
2 Press C/c to select
(BNR),
then press ENTER repeatedly to
select a level.
2 Press C/c to select
(CUSTOM
PICTURE MODE), then press
ENTER repeatedly to select the
setting you want.
1
The default setting is underlined.
DYNAMIC 1
• 1: reduces the “block noise.”
• 2: reduces the “block noise” more than
1.
• 3: reduces the “block noise” more than
2.
• STANDARD: displays a standard
picture.
48
49
Enhancing the Playback
Picture (DIGITAL VIDEO
ENHANCER) (DVP-NS415 only)
• 3: enhances the outline more than 2.
• SOFT: softens the image (DVD only).
To cancel the “DIGITAL VIDEO
ENHANCER” setting
Locking Discs (CUSTOM
Select “OFF” in Step 2.
PARENTAL CONTROL, PARENTAL
CONTROL)
To turn off the Control Bar
The Digital Video Enhancer (DVE) function
makes the picture appear clear and crisp by
enhancing the outlines of images on your TV
screen. Also, this function can soften the
images on the screen.
DVP-NS415
QUICK
Using Various Additional
Functions
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control
Bar is turned off.
3
You can set two kinds of playback restrictions
for the desired disc.
• Custom Parental Control
You can set playback restrictions so that the
player will not play inappropriate discs.
• Parental Control
Playback of some DVDs can be limited
according to a predetermined level such as
the age of the users. Scenes may be blocked
or replaced with different scenes.
The same password is used for both Parental
Control and Custom Parental Control.
Note
Depending on the disc or the scene being played,
noise found in the disc may become more apparent.
If this happens, it is recommended that you use the
BNR function (page 48) with the DVE function. If
the condition still does not improve, reduce the
Digital Video Enhancer level, or select “SOFT”
(DVD only) in Step 2 above.
ENTER
You can set the same Custom Parental
Control password for up to 40 discs. When
you set the 41st-disc, the first disc is canceled.
DISPLAY
The options for “PARENTAL
CONTROL” appear.
OFF
ON
PLAYER
PASSWORD
4
Press X/x to select “ON t,” then
press ENTER.
◆ If you have not entered a password
The display for registering a new
password appears.
PARENTAL CONTROL
1 Press DISPLAY twice during
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS415
playback.
The following Control Bar appears.
Enter a new 4-digit password, then
press ENTER .
Number
buttons
2 Press C/c to select
(DIGITAL
VIDEO ENHANCER), then press
ENTER repeatedly to select a
level.
ENTER
DISPLAY
1
1
2
• 1: enhances the outline.
• 2: enhances the outline more than 1.
Insert the disc you want to lock.
If the disc is playing, press x to stop
playback.
Using Various Additional Functions
Custom Parental Control
Press X/x to select
(PARENTAL
CONTROL), then press ENTER.
Enter a 4-digit password by pressing X/x
to select the digit, followed by C/c to
move the cursor, then press ENTER. You
can also use the number buttons to enter
your password (DVP-NS415 only).
The display for confirming the password
appears.
◆ When you have already registered a
password
The display for entering the password
appears.
Press DISPLAY while the player is in
stop mode.
The following Control Bar appears.
,continued
50
1-12
51
z Hint
If you forget your password, enter the 6-digit
number “199703” using X/x to select the digit,
followed by C/c to move the cursor when the
“CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL” display asks
you for your password, then press ENTER. (Press c
after the 4th digit to allow the entire 6-digit number
to be entered.) The display will ask you to enter a
new 4-digit password. You can also use the number
buttons to enter the digits (DVP-NS415 only).
PARENTAL CONTROL
Enter password, then press
5
ENTER
.
Enter or re-enter your 4-digit password
by pressing X/x to select the digit,
followed by C/c to move the cursor,
then press ENTER.
You can also use the number buttons to
enter your password (DVP-NS415 only).
“Custom parental control is set.” appears
when you enter your password.
To turn off the Custom Parental Control
function
Follow Steps 1 through 3 of “Custom
Parental Control.”
2
Press X/x to select “OFF t,” then press
ENTER.
3
Enter your 4-digit password using X/x to
select the digit, followed by C/c to move
the cursor, then press ENTER. You can
also use the number buttons to enter your
password (DVP-NS415 only).
DVP-NS315
Insert the disc for which Custom Parental
Control is set.
The “CUSTOM PARENTAL
CONTROL” display appears.
5
The selection items for “STANDARD”
are displayed.
PARENTAL CONTROL
LEVEL:
STANDARD:
Enter a new 4-digit password, then
press ENTER .
DVP-NS415
6
Enter a 4-digit password using X/x to
select the digit, followed by C/c to move
the cursor, then press ENTER. You can
also use the number buttons to enter your
password (DVP-NS415 only).
The display for confirming the password
appears.
◆ When you have already registered a
password
The display for entering the password
appears.
ENTER
DISPLAY
Press DISPLAY while the player is in
stop mode.
OFF
USA
USA
OTHERS
Press X/x to select a geographic area
as the playback limitation level, then
press ENTER.
The area is selected.
When you select “OTHERS t,” select
and enter a standard code in the table on
page 54. You can also use the number
buttons to enter your password (DVPNS415 only).
7
Press X/x to select “LEVEL,” then
press ENTER.
The selection items for “LEVEL” are
displayed.
PARENTAL CONTROL
The following Control Bar appears.
Enter password, then press
ENTER
.
PARENTAL CONTROL
LEVEL:
STANDARD:
QUICK
OFF
OFF
8:
7:
6:
5:
CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL
Custom parental control is already
set. To play, enter your password
and press ENTER .
4
2
2
OFF
USA
Press X/x to select “STANDARD,”
then press ENTER.
PARENTAL CONTROL
Number
buttons
1
Press X/x to select “PLAYER t,”
then press ENTER.
◆ If you have not entered a password
The display for registering a new
password appears.
Playback of some DVDs can be limited
according to a predetermined level such as the
age of the users. The “PARENTAL
CONTROL” function allows you to set a
playback limitation level.
To play a disc for which Custom Parental
Control is set
1
3
Parental Control (limiting
playback by children)
PARENTAL CONTROL
LEVEL:
STANDARD:
Enter your 4-digit password using X/x to
select the digit, followed by C/c to move
the cursor, then press ENTER. You can
also use the number buttons to enter your
password (DVP-NS415 only).
The player is ready for playback.
Press X/x to select
(PARENTAL
CONTROL), then press ENTER.
Enter or re-enter your 4-digit password
by pressing X/x to select the digit,
followed by C/c to move the cursor,
then press ENTER.
8
NC17
R
Select the level you want using X/x,
then press ENTER.
Parental Control setting is complete.
You can also use the number buttons to
enter your password (DVP-NS415 only).
The display for setting the playback
limitation level appears.
The options for “PARENTAL
CONTROL” appear.
,continued
52
5
Area Code
PARENTAL CONTROL
LEVEL:
STANDARD:
4:
PG13
USA
The lower the value, the stricter the
limitation.
To turn off the Parental Control function
Set “LEVEL” to “OFF” in Step 8.
Standard
Code
number
Standard
Argentina
2044
Korea
Australia
2047
Malaysia
2363
Austria
2046
Mexico
2362
Belgium
2057
Netherlands
2376
Brazil
2070
New Zealand
2390
Canada
2079
Norway
2379
Chile
2090
Pakistan
2427
China
2092
Philippines
2424
Denmark
2115
Portugal
2436
Code
number
Enter a new 4-digit password using X/
x to select the digit, followed by C/c
to move the cursor, then press ENTER.
You can also use the number buttons to
enter your password (DVP-NS415 only).
2304
6
To confirm your password, re-enter it
using X/x to select the digit, followed
by C/c to move the cursor, then press
ENTER.
2165
Russia
2489
France
2174
Singapore
2501
1
Germany
2109
Spain
2149
India
2248
Sweden
2499
Indonesia
2238
Switzerland
2086
Italy
2254
Thailand
2528
To turn off the display
Japan
2276
United
Kingdom
2184
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the display
is turned off.
2
z Hint
If you forget your password, remove the disc and
repeat Steps 1 to 3 of “Parental Control (limiting
playback by children).” When you are asked to
enter your password, enter “199703” using X/x to
select the digit, followed by C/c to move the
cursor, then press ENTER. (Press c after the 4th
digit to allow the entire 6-digit number to be
entered.) The display will ask you to enter a new 4digit password. After you enter a new 4-digit
password in Step 4, replace the disc in the player
and press H. When the display for entering your
password appears, enter your new password. You
can also use the number buttons to enter the digits
(DVP-NS415 only).
Note
When you play DVDs which do not have the
Parental Control function, playback cannot be
limited on this player.
DVP-NS315
DVP-NS415
TV
VOL
Number
buttons
TV/VIDEO
Press C before you press ENTER and input
the correct number.
If you make a mistake
Press O RETURN.
You can control your TV using the buttons
below.
Changing the password
By pressing
You can
1
TV [/1
Turn the TV on or off
Press DISPLAY while the player is in
stop mode.
The Control Bar appears.
2
Adjust the volume of the TV
TV/VIDEO
Switch the TV’s input source
between the TV and other
input sources
Press X/x to select
(PARENTAL
CONTROL), then press ENTER.
The options for “PARENTAL
CONTROL” appear.
3
VOL +/–
Using Various Additional Functions
Enter your 4-digit password using X/x to
select the digit, followed by C/c to move
the cursor, then press ENTER. You can
also use the number buttons to enter your
password (DVP-NS415 only).
The player starts playback.
You can control the sound level, input source,
and power switch of your Sony TV with the
supplied remote.
If you make a mistake entering your
password
Finland
53
Controlling Your TV with
the Supplied Remote
You can also use the number buttons to
enter your password (DVP-NS415 only).
To play a disc for which Parental Control is
set
Insert the disc and press H.
The display for entering your password
appears.
Using Various Additional Functions
1
OFF
ON
PLAYER
PASSWORD
Note
Depending on the unit being connected, you may
not be able to control your TV using some of the
buttons.
Press X/x to select “PASSWORD
t,” then press ENTER.
The display for entering the password
appears.
4
Enter your 4-digit password using X/x
to select the digit, followed by C/c to
move the cursor, then press ENTER.
You can also use the number buttons to
enter your password (DVP-NS415 only).
,continued
54
1-13
55
3 Press X/x to select “CUSTOM,”
Controlling other TVs with the
remote (DVP-NS415 only)
You can control the sound level, input source,
and power switch of non-Sony TVs as well.
If your TV is listed in the table below, set the
appropriate manufacturer’s code.
1
While holding down TV [/1, press the
number buttons to select your TV’s
manufacturer’s code (see the table
below).
2
Release TV [/1.
then press ENTER.
Settings and Adjustments
The Setup Display appears.
Using the Setup Display
By using the Setup Display, you can make
various adjustments to items such as picture
and sound. You can also set a language for the
subtitles and the Setup Display, among other
things. For details on each Setup Display
item, see pages from 58 to 62.
LANGUAGE SETUP
OSD:
MENU:
AUDIO:
SUBTITLE:
4 Press X/x to select the setup item
from the displayed list:
“LANGUAGE SETUP,” “SCREEN
SETUP,” “CUSTOM SETUP,” or
“AUDIO SETUP.” Then press
ENTER.
Note
Playback settings stored in the disc take priority
over the Setup Display settings and not all the
functions described may work.
Code numbers of controllable TVs
Manufacturer
Code number
Sony (default)
01
JVC
09
DVP-NS315
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ORIGINAL
ENGLISH
DVP-NS415
19
The Setup item is selected.
Example: “SCREEN SETUP”
Philips
21
Selected item
RCA
10
Samsung
20
Sanyo
11
Sharp
18
Toshiba
07
Zenith
15
SCREEN SETUP
TV TYPE:
SCREEN SAVER:
BACKGROUND:
4:3 LETTER BOX
ON
JACKET PICTURE
ENTER
Setup items
DISPLAY
Notes
1 Press DISPLAY when the player is
• If you enter a new code number, the code number
previously entered will be erased.
• When you replace the batteries of the remote, the
code number you have set may be reset to the
default setting. Set the appropriate code number
again.
5 Select an item using X/x, then
Settings and Adjustments
Panasonic
press ENTER.
The options for the selected item appear.
Example: “TV TYPE”
in stop mode.
The Control Bar appears.
SCREEN SETUP
TV TYPE:
SCREEN SAVER:
BACKGROUND:
QUICK
4:3 LETTER BOX
4:3 LETTER BOX
4:3 PAN SCAN
16:9
Options
2 Press X/x to select
(SETUP),
then press ENTER.
,continued
56
6 Select a setting using X/x, then
press ENTER.
The setting is selected and setup is
complete.
Example: “16:9”
Setting the Display or
Sound Track Language
Settings for the Display
(SCREEN SETUP)
(LANGUAGE SETUP)
Choose settings according to the TV to be
connected.
Selected setting
SCREEN SETUP
TV TYPE:
SCREEN SAVER:
BACKGROUND:
16:9
ON
JACKET PICTURE
“LANGUAGE SETUP” allows you to set
various languages for the on-screen display or
sound track.
Select “SCREEN SETUP” in the Setup
Display. To use the display, see “Using the
Setup Display” (page 57).
The default settings are underlined.
Select “LANGUAGE SETUP” in the Setup
Display. To use the display, see “Using the
Setup Display” (page 57).
LANGUAGE SETUP
OSD:
MENU:
AUDIO:
SUBTITLE:
SCREEN SETUP
TV TYPE:
SCREEN SAVER:
BACKGROUND:
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ORIGINAL
ENGLISH
4:3 LETTER BOX
ON
JACKET PICTURE
To turn off the display
Select “QUICK” in Step 3. Follow from Step
5 of the Quick Setup explanation to make
basic adjustments (page 25).
If you select “RESET” in Step 3, you can
reset all of the “SETUP” settings on pages 58
to 62 to the default settings. After you select
“RESET” and press ENTER, select “YES”
and press ENTER to reset the settings (it
takes a few seconds to complete), or select
“NO” and press ENTER to return to the
Control Bar. Do not press [/1 when resetting
the player.
◆ SCREEN SAVER
The screen saver image appears when you
leave the player in pause or stop mode for 15
minutes, or when you play back a CD or
DATA CD (MP3 audio) for more than 15
minutes. The screen saver will help prevent
your display device from becoming damaged
(ghosting). Press H to turn off the screen
saver.
ON
Turns on the screen saver.
OFF
Turns off the screen saver.
◆ TV TYPE
Selects the aspect ratio of the connected TV
(4:3 standard or wide).
◆ OSD (On-Screen Display)
Switches the display language on the screen.
4:3
LETTER
BOX
◆ MENU (DVD only)
You can select the desired language for the
disc’s menu.
◆ AUDIO (DVD only)
Switches the language of the sound track.
When you select “ORIGINAL,” the language
given priority in the disc is selected.
◆ SUBTITLE (DVD only)
Switches the language of the subtitle recorded
on the DVD.
When you select “AUDIO FOLLOW,” the
language for the subtitles changes according to
the language you selected for the sound track.
Select this when you connect a
4:3 screen TV. Displays a wide
picture with bands on the upper
and lower portions of the
screen.
Selects the background color or picture on the
TV screen in stop mode or while playing a
CD or DATA CD (MP3 audio).
JACKET
PICTURE
The jacket picture (still picture)
appears, but only when the
jacket picture is already
recorded on the disc (CDEXTRA, etc.). If the disc does
not contain a jacket picture, the
“GRAPHICS” picture appears.
4:3
Select this when you connect a
PAN SCAN 4:3 screen TV. Automatically
displays the wide picture on the
entire screen and cuts off the
portions that do not fit.
GRAPHICS A preset picture stored in the
player appears.
BLUE
The background color is blue.
16:9
BLACK
The background color is black.
Select this when you connect a
wide-screen TV or a TV with a
wide mode function.
Settings and Adjustments
To reset all of the “SETUP” settings
Note
Depending on the DVD, “4:3 LETTER BOX” may
be selected automatically instead of “4:3 PAN
SCAN” or vice versa.
◆ BACKGROUND
Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the display
is turned off.
To enter the Quick Setup mode
57
4:3 LETTER BOX
z Hint
If you select “OTHERS t” in “MENU,”
“SUBTITLE,” and “AUDIO,” select and enter a
language code from “Language Code List” on
page 68 using X/x to select the digit, followed by
C/c to move the cursor. You can also use the
number buttons to enter the digits (DVP-NS415
only).
4:3 PAN SCAN
16:9
Note
When you select a language in “MENU,”
“SUBTITLE,” or “AUDIO” that is not recorded on
the DVD, one of the recorded languages will be
automatically selected.
58
59
1-14
Custom Settings (CUSTOM
◆ PAUSE MODE (DVD only)
Selects the picture in pause mode.
Settings for the Sound
AUTO
(AUDIO SETUP)
Use this to set up playback related and other
settings.
The picture, including subjects
that move dynamically, is
output with no jitter. Normally
select this position.
FRAME
Select “CUSTOM SETUP” in the Setup
Display. To use the display, see “Using the
Setup Display” (page 57).
The default settings are underlined.
The picture, including subjects
that do not move dynamically,
is output in high resolution.
◆ TRACK SELECTION (DVD only)
SETUP)
CUSTOM SETUP
AUTO POWER OFF:
AUTO PLAY:
DIMMER:
PAUSE MODE:
TRACK SELECTION:
MULTI-DISC RESUME:
OFF
OFF
BRIGHT
AUTO
OFF
ON
“AUDIO SETUP” allows you to set the sound
according to the playback and connection
conditions.
Select “AUDIO SETUP” in the Setup
Display. To use the display, see “Using the
Setup Display” (page 57).
The default settings are underlined.
Gives the sound track which contains the
highest number of channels priority when you
play a DVD on which multiple audio formats
(PCM, DTS, or Dolby Digital format) are
recorded.
OFF
No priority given.
AUTO
Priority given.
AUDIO SETUP
AUDIO ATT:
OFF
AUDIO DRC:
STANDARD
DOWNMIX:
DOLBY SURROUND
DIGITAL OUT:
ON
D-PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL:
DTS:
OFF
◆ AUTO POWER OFF
Switches the Auto Power Off setting on or
off.
Switches this function off.
ON
The player enters standby mode
when left in stop mode for more
than 30 minutes.
◆ AUTO PLAY
Switches the Auto Play setting on or off. This
function is useful when the player is
connected to a timer (not supplied).
OFF
Switches this function off.
ON
Automatically starts playback
when the player is turned on.
◆ DIMMER
Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display.
BRIGHT
Makes the lighting bright.
DARK
Makes the lighting dark.
OFF
Turns off the lighting.
If the playback sound is distorted, set this
item to “ON.” The player reduces the audio
output level.
This function affects the output of the LINE
OUT L/R (AUDIO) jacks.
OFF
Does not store the resume
settings in memory. Playback
restarts at the resume point only
for the current disc in the player.
Select this when the playback sound
from the speakers is distorted.
DOLBY
SURROUND
Select this when the player is
connected to an audio
component that conforms to
Dolby Surround (Pro Logic).
NORMAL
Select this when the player is
connected to an audio
component that does not
conform to Dolby Surround (Pro
Logic).
◆ DIGITAL OUT
Selects if audio signals are output via the
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL)
jack.
ON
Normally select this position. When
you select “ON,” see “Setting the
digital output signal” for further
settings.
OFF
The influence of the digital circuit
upon the analog circuit is minimal.
Makes the sound clear when the volume is
turned down when playing a DVD that
conforms to “AUDIO DRC.” This affects the
output from the following jacks:
– LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) jacks
– DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL)
jack only when “DOLBY DIGITAL” is set
to “D-PCM” (page 62).
Switches the Multi-disc Resume setting on or
off. Resume playback can be stored in
memory for up to 6 different DVD/VIDEO
CD discs (page 31).
Stores the resume settings in
memory for up to six discs (The
settings remain in memory even
if you select OFF.)
Normally, select this position.
ON
◆ AUDIO DRC (Dynamic Range Control)
(DVD only)
◆ MULTI-DISC RESUME (DVP-NS415
only) (DVD/VIDEO CD only)
ON
OFF
Switches the method for mixing down to 2
channels when you play a DVD which has
rear sound elements (channels) or is recorded
in Dolby Digital format. For details on the
rear signal components, see “Checking the
audio signal format” (page 43). This function
affects the output of the following jacks:
– LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) jacks
– DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL)
jack when “DOLBY DIGITAL” is set to
“D-PCM” (page 62).
STANDARD Normally select this position.
TV MODE
Makes the low sounds clear
even if you turn the volume
down.
WIDE
RANGE
Gives you the feeling of being
at a live performance.
,continued
60
Setting the digital output signal
Switches the method of outputting audio
signals when you connect a component such
as an amplifier (receiver) or MD deck with a
digital input jack.
For connection details, see page 20.
Select “DOLBY DIGITAL” and “DTS” after
setting “DIGITAL OUT” to “ON.”
AUDIO SETUP
AUDIO ATT:
OFF
AUDIO DRC:
STANDARD
DOWNMIX:
DOLBY SURROUND
DIGITAL OUT:
ON
D-PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL:
DTS:
OFF
If you connect a component that does not
conform to the selected audio signal, a loud
noise (or no sound) will come out from the
speakers, affecting your ears or causing the
speakers to be damaged.
◆ DTS (DVD only)
ON
Additional Information
Select this when the player is
connected to an audio
component lacking a built-in
DTS decoder.
Troubleshooting
Select this when the player is
connected to an audio
component with a built-in DTS
decoder.
If you experience any of the following
difficulties while using the player, use this
troubleshooting guide to help remedy the
problem before requesting repairs. Should
any problem persist, consult your nearest
Sony dealer.
Note
If you select one of the TVS settings while playing
a DVD, the player does not output Dolby Digital
signals from the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or
COAXIAL) jack (when you set “DOLBY
DIGITAL” in “AUDIO SETUP” to “D-PCM”)
(page 62).
Power
The power is not turned on.
, Check that the AC power cord is connected
securely.
Picture
There is no picture/picture noise appears.
Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal.
DOLBY
DIGITAL
Select this when the player is
connected to an audio
component lacking a built-in
Dolby Digital decoder. You can
select whether the signals
conform to Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) or not by making
adjustments to the
“DOWNMIX” item in
“AUDIO SETUP” (page 61).
Select this when the player is
connected to an audio
component with a built-in
Dolby Digital decoder.
Even though you set the aspect ratio in “TV
TYPE” of “SCREEN SETUP,” the picture
does not fill the screen.
, The aspect ratio of the disc is fixed on your
DVD.
There is no picture from your VCR
connected to the LINE IN jacks.
, The DVD player must be in standby mode
to view pictures from your VCR.
There is no sound.
, Re-connect the connecting cord securely.
, The connecting cord is damaged.
, The player is connected to the wrong input
jack on the amplifier (receiver) (page 22,
23, 24).
, The amplifier (receiver) input is not
correctly set.
, The player is in pause mode or in Slowmotion Play mode.
, The player is in fast forward or fast reverse
mode.
, If the audio signal does not come through
the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or
COAXIAL) jack, check the audio settings
(page 61).
Sound is noisy.
, When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks,
noise will come from the LINE OUT L/R
(AUDIO) jacks (page 27) or DIGITAL
OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack.
Sound distortion occurs.
, Set “AUDIO ATT” in “AUDIO SETUP” to
“ON” (page 61).
The sound volume is low.
, The sound volume is low on some DVDs.
The sound volume may improve if you set
“AUDIO DRC” to “TV MODE” (page 61).
, Set “AUDIO ATT” in “AUDIO SETUP” to
“OFF” (page 61).
Operation
The remote does not function.
, There are obstacles between the remote and
the player.
, The distance between the remote and the
player is too far.
, The remote is not pointed at the remote
sensor on the player.
, The batteries in the remote are weak.
The disc does not play.
, The disc is turned over.
Insert the disc with the playback side facing
down on the disc tray.
, The disc is skewed.
, The player cannot play certain discs (page 6).
, The region code on the DVD does not match
,continued
62
1-15
Additional Information
, Re-connect the connecting cord securely.
, The connecting cords are damaged.
, Check the connection to your TV (page 18)
and switch the input selector on your TV so
that the signal from the player appears on
the TV screen.
, The disc is dirty or flawed.
, If the picture output from your player goes
through your VCR to get to your TV or if
you are connected to a combination TV/
VIDEO player, the copy-protection signal
applied to some DVD programs could affect
picture quality. If you still experience
problems even when you connect your
player directly to your TV, please try
connecting your player to your TV’s S
VIDEO input (page 18).
◆ DOLBY DIGITAL (DVD only)
D-PCM
61
Sound
Selects whether or not to output DTS signals.
OFF
Settings and Adjustments
OFF
◆ AUDIO ATT (attenuation)
Notes
• When you set the item to “AUTO,” the language
may change. The “TRACK SELECTION” setting
has higher priority than the “AUDIO” settings in
“LANGUAGE SETUP” (page 58).
• If you set “DTS” to “OFF” (page 62), the DTS
sound track is not played even if you set “TRACK
SELECTION” to “AUTO.”
• If PCM, DTS, and Dolby Digital sound tracks
have the same number of channels, the player
selects PCM, DTS, and Dolby Digital sound
tracks in this order.
◆ DOWNMIX (DVD only)
63
the player.
, Moisture has condensed inside the player
(page 3).
, The player cannot play CD-Rs, CD-RWs,
DVD-Rs, or DVD-RWs (video mode) that
are not finalized (page 6).
The MP3 audio track cannot be played
(page 34).
, The DATA CD is not recorded in the MP3
format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/
Level 2 or Joliet.
, The MP3 audio track does not have the
extension “.MP3.”
, The data is not formatted in MP3 even
though it has the extension “.MP3.”
, The data is not MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 data.
, The player cannot play audio tracks in
MP3PRO format.
The title of the MP3 audio album or track
is not correctly displayed.
, The player can only display numbers and
alphabet. Other characters are displayed as
asterisks.
The disc does not start playing from the
beginning.
Self-diagnosis Function
(When letters/numbers appear in the
display)
When the self-diagnosis function is activated
to prevent the player from malfunctioning, a
five-character service number (e.g., C 13 50)
with a combination of a letter and four digits
appears on the screen and the front panel
display. In this case, check the following
table.
C:13:50
, Try using the DVD’s menu instead of the
direct selection button on the remote (page
32).
, Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD
being played.
, The angle can only be changed when the
“ ” indicator lights up on the front panel
display (page 9).
, The DVD prohibits changing of the angles.
The player does not operate properly.
Nothing is displayed on the front panel
display.
, Depending on the disc, you may not be able
to do some of the operations above. See the
operating manual that comes with the disc.
, The MP3 audio track you want to play is
broken.
, The data is not MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 data.
The angles cannot be changed.
, The disc features an auto playback function.
, “AUTO PLAY” in “CUSTOM SETUP” is
set to “ON” (page 60).
You cannot perform some functions such
as Stop, Search, Slow-motion Play,
Repeat Play, Shuffle Play, or Program
Play.
“Data error” appears on the TV screen
when playing a DATA CD.
, Try using the DVD’s menu instead of the
direct selection button on the remote (page
32).
, Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on
the DVD being played.
, The DVD prohibits the changing of the
subtitles.
, When static electricity, etc., causes the
player to operate abnormally, unplug the
player.
, While playing discs with an auto pause
signal, the player stops playback at the auto
pause signal.
, Contact your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.
The subtitle language cannot be changed
or turned off.
The player starts playing the disc
automatically.
Playback stops automatically.
The disc tray does not open and “TRAY
LOCKED” appears on the front panel
display.
, Try using the DVD’s menu instead of the
direct selection button on the remote (page
32).
, Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the
DVD being played.
, The DVD prohibits the changing of the
language for the sound track.
First three
characters of
the service
number
Cause and/or corrective
action
C 13
The disc is dirty.
, Clean the disc with a soft
cloth (page 7).
C 31
The disc is not inserted
correctly.
, Re-insert the disc
correctly.
E XX
To prevent a malfunction, the
(xx is a number) player has performed the
self-diagnosis function.
, Contact your nearest
Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service
facility and give the 5character service number.
Example: E 61 10
, “DIMMER” in “CUSTOM SETUP” is set
to “OFF.” Set “DIMMER” to “BRIGHT” or
“DARK” (page 60).
Additional Information
, Program Play, Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, or
A-B Repeat Play has been selected (page
35).
, Resume play has taken effect (page 31).
The language for the sound track cannot
be changed.
5 numbers or letters are displayed on the
screen and on the front panel display.
, The self-diagnosis function was activated.
(See the table on page 65.)
The disc tray does not open and “LOCKED”
appears on the front panel display.
, Child Lock is set (page 28).
64
65
Glossary
Chapter (page 9)
Sections of a picture or a music feature that
are smaller than titles. A title is composed of
several chapters. Depending on the disc, no
chapters may be recorded.
Dolby Digital (page 24, 62)
Digital audio compression technology
developed by Dolby Laboratories. This
technology conforms to 5.1-channel surround
sound. The rear channel is stereo and there is
a discrete subwoofer channel in this format.
Dolby Digital provides the same 5.1 discrete
channels of high quality digital audio found in
Dolby Digital cinema audio systems. Good
channel separation is realized because all of
the channel data are recorded discretely and
little deterioration is realized because all
channel data processing is digital.
Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) (page 23)
Audio signal processing technology that
Dolby Laboratories developed for surround
sound. When the input signal contains a
surround component, the Pro Logic process
outputs the front, center and rear signals. The
rear channel is monaural.
GB, a single-layer and double-sided DVD is
9.4 GB, and double-layer and double-sided
DVD is 17GB.
The picture data uses the MPEG 2 format, one
of the worldwide standards of digital
compression technology. The picture data is
compressed to about 1/40 (average) of its
original size. The DVD also uses a variable
rate coding technology that changes the data
to be allocated according to the status of the
picture. Audio information is recorded in a
multi-channel format, such as Dolby Digital,
allowing you to enjoy a more real audio
presence.
Furthermore, various advanced functions
such as the multi-angle, multilingual, and
Parental Control functions are provided with
the DVD.
Language Code List
For details, see pages 43, 47, 58.
The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.
Index (CD)/Video Index (VIDEO CD) (page
9)
Scene (page 9)
On a VIDEO CD with PBC (playback
control) functions, the menu screens, moving
pictures and still pictures are divided into
sections called “scenes.”
Title (page 9)
Digital audio compression technology that
Digital Theater Systems, Inc. developed. This
technology conforms to 5.1-channel surround
sound. The rear channel is stereo and there is
a discrete subwoofer channel in this format.
DTS provides the same 5.1 discrete channels
of high quality digital audio.
Good channel separation is realized because
all of the channel data is recorded discretely
and little deterioration is realized because all
channel data processing is digital.
The longest section of a picture or music
feature on a DVD, movie, etc., in video
software, or the entire album in audio
software.
Code Language
Code Language
Code Language
1027
1028
1032
1039
1044
1045
1051
1052
1053
1057
1059
1060
1061
1066
1183
1186
1194
1196
1203
1209
1217
1226
1229
1233
1235
1239
1245
1248
1253
1254
1257
1261
1269
1283
1287
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1305
1307
1311
1313
1326
1327
1332
1334
1347
1349
1350
1352
1353
1356
1357
1358
1363
1365
1369
1376
1379
1393
1403
1408
1417
1428
1435
1507
1508
1509
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1521
1525
1527
1528
1529
1531
1532
1534
1535
1538
1539
1540
1543
1557
1564
1572
1581
1587
1613
1632
1665
1684
1697
1067
1070
1079
1093
1097
1103
1105
1109
1130
1142
1144
1145
1149
1150
1151
1157
1165
1166
1171
1174
1181
A number that divides a track into sections to
easily locate the point you want on a CD or
VIDEO CD. Depending on the disc, no index
may be recorded.
DTS (page 24, 62)
Code Language
Track (page 9)
Sections of a picture or a music feature on a
CD or VIDEO CD (the length of a song).
DVD (page 6)
A disc that contains up to 8 hours of moving
pictures even though its diameter is the same
as a CD.
The data capacity of a single-layer and singlesided DVD is 4.7 GB (Giga Byte), which is 7
times that of a CD. The data capacity of a
double-layer and single-sided DVD is 8.5
66
68
1-16E
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Amharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali;
Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
German
Bhutani
Greek
English
Esperanto
Spanish
Estonian
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
French
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Italian
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian;
Lettish
1345 Malagasy
1436
1463
1481
1482
1483
1489
1491
1495
1498
1501
1502
1503
1505
1506
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Dutch
Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan)Oromo
Oriya
Punjabi
Polish
Pashto;
Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
RhaetoRomance
Kirundi
Romanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
SerboCroatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapük
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Chinese
Zulu
1703 Not specified
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. UPPER CASE
2 Tapping screws
3 Three screws
(SUMIEITE(B3)+BV)
4 Upper case
7 Tray cover
5
1 Tapping screws
Chassis back
6
2-2. FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY and FR SUPPORT
9 Two screws
(SUMIEITE(B3)+BV)
1 Claw
0 FP support
3 Two claws
4 Three claws
2 Claw
8 FL-126 board
7 Connector
(FF-206, CN301, 3P)
5 Front panel assmbly
6 Two claws
2-1
2-3. LOADING ASSEMBLY
4 Therr screws
(SUMIEITE(B3)+BV)
5 Loading assembly
3 FMM-41 flexible board (CN203, 26P)
2 FMO-4 flexible board (CN204, 9P)
1 FMS-17 flexible board (CN201, 6P)
2-4. OPTICAL DEVICE (KHM-270AAA)
6 Optical device (KHM-270AAA)
4 Insulator
3 FMM-41 flexible board (26P)
5 Two Insulator
2 FMO-4 flexible board (9P)
1 Therr Insulator screws
2-2
2-5. DC MOTOR and MS-81 BOARD
5 Two screws (+P 2.6 × 3)
4 Belt
1 Two claws
3 Tray
6 Pulley motor
8 DC motor (M001)
9 FMS-17 flexible board
CN001, 5P)
0 MS-81 board
2
7 Remove solder (two places)
2-6. ER-14R BOARD
3 ER-14R board
2 Two screws
(SUMIEITE(B3)+BV)
1 FAE-9 flexible board (CN901, 21P)
2-3
2-7. AV-61 BOARD
2 Connector (CN202, 7P)
5 AV-61 board
4 Two screws
(SUMIEITE(B3)+BV)
1 Connector (CN601, 25P)
3 Three screws
(SUMIEITE(B3)+BV)
2-8. MB-103 BOARD
6 FMM-41 flexible board (CN203, 26P)
4 Connector (CN102, 6P)
5 FMO-4 flexible board (CN204, 9P)
7 four screws
(SUMIEITE(B3)+BV)
3 FMS-17 flexible board (CN201, 5P)
8 MB-103 board
2 Connector (CN101, 9P)
1 Connector (CN601, 25P)
2-4
2-9. IF-89 BOARD
7 Connector (FF-206, CN406, 3P)
7 Connector (PF-127, CN401, 13P)
9 Two screws
(SUMIEITE(B3)+BV)
0 IF-89 board
6 Connector (CN102, 6P)
5 Connector (CN402, 7P)
3 FMM-41 flexible board
(CN203, 26P)
4 Connector (CN101, 9P)
1 FMS-17 flexible board
(CN201, 5P)
2 FMO-4 flexible board
(CN204, 9P)
2-10. SWITCHING REGULATOR
1 Connector (CN101, 2P)
3 Therr screws
(SUMIEITE(B3)+BV)
1 Connector (FF-127, CN201, 13P)
4 Power block
2-5
2-11.INTERNAL VIEWS
DC motor
(Loading)
DC motor
(Loading)
1-763-790-11
Optical device
(KHM-270AAA/Z-NP)
A-6062-709-A
2-6
2-12.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
Power block
AV-61 board
(AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)
ER-14 board
(AV AMP)
MS-81 board
(LIADING MOTOR)
FL-126 board
(LED)
MB-103 board
(DVD/CD RF AMP, SERVO,
MOYOR DRIVE, AD DECODER,
SYSTEM CONTROL,
AUDIO ADC, PLL)
IF-89 board
(IF COM)
2-7
MEMO
2-8E
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM
AV-61 BOARD
MB-103 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-31 to 4-34)
(SEE PAGE 4-15 to 4-28)
IC404
16M SDRAM
J103
S VIDEO OUT
V, Y, C
BASE UNIT
IC303
KHM-270AAA/J1RP
16M DRAM
LINE OUT
J104 (1/2)
VIDEO 2
IC102
VIDEO
BUFFER
OPTICAL DEVICE
IC403
CN103
IC201
DVD/CD
PD IC
VIDEO 1
RF
RF+
AV DECODER
SDI 0 – 7
DVD/CD RF AMP,
DIGITAL SERVO
Y, Cb, Cr
D1 VIDEO
OUT
IC301
ARP,
SERVO DSP
SPDIF, ACH12,
ACH34, ACH56,
BCK, LRCK
CDDOUT, CDDATA,
CDBCK, CDLRCK
FOCUS
COIL
J201
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
OUT
PARALLEL BUS
TRACKING
COIL
SPDIF
IC204
OPTICAL
IC202
FOCUS/TRACKING
COIL DRIVE,
SPINDLE/SLED/
LOADING
MOTOR DRIVE
INLIMIT
SENSOR
SPINDLE
MOTOR
M
IC106
FLASH
MEMORY
IC104
SLED
MOTOR
SYSTEM
CONTROL
M
IC101
LINE OUT
EEPROM
IC601
M
AU+5V
M001
LOADING
MOTOR
SERIAL BUS
S001
J101 (2/2)
IC201
AUDIO
AMP
AUDIO
D/A CONVERTER
MS-81 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-17)
EVER+3.3V
AI+5V
AU+11V
SW–13V
+1.8V
SW+3.3V
+5V
+11V
CHUCK/TRAY
DETECT
REG
SWITCHING REGULATOR
(SRV1246JUC)
(SEE PAGE 4-37)
ND401
IC403
FLUORESCENT
INDICATOR TUBE
REG
IC404
F101
2A
EVER+3.3V
SW+3.3V
+5V
SW+11V
D101-104
SWITCHING
REG
AC IN
100V 50/60Hz
IF COM
FUNCTION
KEY
EVER–13V
P CON
SW801
POWER
POWER
IF-89 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-9)
16
3-1
3-2
L
L
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 1
R
R
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
3-2. RF/SERVO BLOCK DIAGRAM
6 CN202 1 (CD PB)
6 CN202 1 (DVD PB)
7 CN202 3
7 CN202 3
(CD PLAY)
(DVD PLAY)
210mVp-p
0.2usec/div
440mVp-p
40usec/div
20ms/div
640mVp-p
210mVp-p
20ms/div
BASE UNIT
MB-103 BOARD (1/4)
KHM-250AAA/J1RP
8 CN202 4
(SEE PAGE 4-15, 17, 19)
DVD/CD RF AMP,
DIGITAL SERVO
OPTICAL DEVICE
8 CN202 4
(DVD PLAY)
IC201
40ms/div
(CD PLAY)
1.9Vp-p
1.8Vp-p
200ms/div
CN203
RF
A–D
22
2 RF IN
24
25
17
16
14
ı A–D
11
SIGO 59
FE 42
TE 41
PI 36
7
ı A2 – D2
10
DVD/CD
PD IC
E–H
VC
PD
15
23
18
26
15
ı E–H
18
20
19 VC
21 DVDPD
22 CDPD
13
DVD LD
CD LD
VR
8
Q201
DVD LD DRIVE
6
Q202
CD LD DRIVE
FE
TE
PI
148 MIRR
152 TZC
SRD 45
SWD ı
SCLK 48
SDEN
159
161
162
167
SSDFCTI
SS MON
SIGNAL PROCESSOR
(SEE PAGE 3-5)
125 ADC1
124 ADC0
126 ADC2
MIRR 33
TZC 37
DFT 38
MON 44
DVD/CD
LD MODULE
RF+
GIO6/SDI
GIO7/SDO
GIO8/SCK
GIO13
147 DFCTI
131 ADC7
25 DVD LD
129 ADC5, 6
130
VCI 39
26 CD LD
IC301 (1/2)
LDON 27
SERVO DSP
12
153 GIO0/INT2
+3.3V
IC202
42
40
VREF 43
FCS±
FOCUS
COIL
37
36
4
3
FOCUS
COIL
DRIVE
48
1
FDRV±
20 POM 2, 3
22
19
7
45
SLE
SPFG
PS 39
SPINDLE
MOTOR
SPM±
M
27
28
9
8
SPINDLE
MOTOR
DRIVE
13
21
SLED
MOTOR
SLA±, SLB±
M
32
ı
29
1
ı
4
SLED
MOTOR
DRIVE
XSDPCS
7
10
127 ADC3
128 ADC4
32 33
154
143 144 155 163 164 146
MDSO, MDPO
SYSTEM CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-7)
SPMUTE
SLDA, SLDB
20
TSD-M 22
MS-81 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-17)
M001
LOADING
MOTOR
CN001
M
CN402
1
2
LDM±
25
24
5
4
LOADING
MOTOR
DRIVE
16
17
15
XDRVMUTE
TSD
LMP, LMM
LMCTL
S001
CHUCK/TRAY
DETECT
4
5
CKSW1
OCSW1
XRST
PWM2
47
46
HCS 12
15
POM 0, 1
17
GIO9/FGREF
GIO10/FGIN
INLIM
INLIMIT
SENSOR
TDRV±
GIO2/INT4
5
CN204
XSDPIT
XRESET 61
3
4
PWM0, 1
TRACKING
COIL
DRIVE
GIO1/INT3
35
34
2
1
MDSO
MDPO
TRK±
TRACKING
COIL
HINT 11
XLDON
CKSW1
OCSW1
2
1
16
3-3
3-4
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
3-3. SIGNAL PROCESSOR BLOCK DIAGRAM
MB-98 BOARD (2/4)
(SEE PAGE 4-19 to 4-23)
IC404
16M SDRAM
IC303
(DVD PLAY)
65 – 74
MA 0 – 9
40ns/div
36 – 43
46 – 53
105-108 110-113
115 116 118 120
135-138 140-143
145-148 150
151 153 154
SDDQ 0 – 15
29 31
30
CS, WE,
CAS, RAS
CLK, CKE,
DQML, DQMU,
ADDT 0 – 15
q; IC301 <zzz (CL301)
ADAD 0 – 11
WE, RAS
LCAS, UCAS
MEMA 0 – 9
MEMD 0 – 15
16M DRAM
122 124 125
127 129 130
132 133
qf IC403 tj
MD 0 – 15
1.2Vp-p
qg IC403 tl
950mVp-p
H
RF/SERVO
(SEE PAGE 3-4)
111 RFIN1
RF+
77
SD 0 – 7 ı
84
113 RFIN2
37
ı
40
DTI 0 – 7
42
ı
45
SDI 0 – 7
650mVp-p
H
0.2µs/div
SDCK
XSHD
XSRQ
XSAK
SDEF
1.4Vp-p
IC301 (2/2)
ARP
DATA
BCLK
LRCK
DOUT
57
ı
59
63
64
SDCK, XSHD,
XSRQ, XSAK, SDEF
47
ı
51
CDDATA, CDBCK,
CDLRCK, CDDOUT
169
170
175
56
31
32
34
35
CB/R
R OUT 59
qa IC301 <zzc (CL302)
(CD PLAY)
CN601 (1/3)
Y/G
G OUT 57
CR/B
B OUT 61
qh IC403 ya
ICLKI
IERRI
ISTARTI
IVALI
IREQO
COMPOUT
COMPOUT 65
650mVp-p
H
YOUT
Y OUT 55
COUT
C OUT 63
CDIN2I
CDIN1I
CDBCKI
CDLRKI
5
Y/G
3
Cb/R
1
Cr/B
11
V
7
Y
9
C
VIDEO
(SEE PAGE 3-9)
qk IC403 yg
qj IC403 yd
1.1Vp-p
H
850mVp-p
XARPIT
XARPCS
XWAIT
26 XINT
27 XCS
28 XWAT
A0–7
2
ı
9
33MARP
150 CLKIN
D0–7
134
ı
141
HA 0 – 21
HA 0 – 7
HD 8 – 15
HD 0 – 15
H
168-169
171-174
176-179
181-184
186-189
191-194
HAD 0 – 21
2–5
7 – 10
12 – 15
17 – 20
HD 0 – 15
qd IC403 tg
950mVp-p
H
IC403
TDO
TCK
TDI
TMS
TRST
24 XWR
25 XRD
LAND
(FOR J TAG)
TRST
SYSTEM CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-7)
97
99
98
101
102
HA 0 – 21
HA 0 – 21
HD 0 – 15
HD 0 – 15
XRD
XWRH
TDI
TCK
TDO
TMS
TRST
AV DECODER
196 HCSn
197 HRWn
VREFI 70
RV401
VIDEO
LEVEL
ADJ
qs IC403 ws
207 RSTn
22 ACLK
XRST
512FSAVD
XAVDCS2
XAVDCS3
166 HAD23
167 HAD22
158
160
200
199
27MAVD
XAVDIT
CLKI
SCLKI
HWAIT0n
HIREQ0
4.8Vp-p
40.8nsec
ql IC403 <zb, <zn/
5.1Vp-p
37nsec
DM ACK1
DM REQ1
DM ACK0
DM REQ0
XWRH
XRD
175
174
173
172
171
ACH12
ACH34
ACH56
LRCKO
BCKO
DO
24
25
26
28
29
30
ACH12
LAND
LRCK
BCK
SPDIF
202 – 205
16
DREQ0
DACK0
DREQ1
DACK1
3-5
3-6
AUDIO
(SEE PAGE 3-11)
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
3-4. SYSTEM CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
MB-103 BOARD (3/4)
(SEE PAGE 4-25 to 4-28)
IC106
HD 0 – 15
HD 0 – 15
5 IC104 tf
1 – 5 102 – 109 111 – 118 120
HA 0 – 21
XRD
XWRH
85 – 100
58
HD 0 – 15
CSOX
HA 0 – 21
HA0 – 21
HA 0 – 21
HD0 – 15
HA1 – 20
HD0 – 15
FLASH
70 XRD
71 XWRH
1.8Vp-p
60.6nsec
X1 53
SIGNAL PROCESSOR
(SEE PAGE 3-5)
X2 54
XARPIT
XARPCS
XWAIT
XRST
17
62
67
35
X101
16.5MHz
INT1
CS4X
XWAIT
XRST
RF/SERVO
(SEE PAGE 3-4)
XRST
XSDPIT
XSDPCS
XDRVMUTE
XLDON
CKSW1
OCSW1
18
63
48
82
56
57
INT2
CS5X
XDRVMUTE
WIDE
CKSW1
OCSW1
CN601 (2/3)
WIDE
XARPRST 36
2
WIDE
4
1
3
6
5
8
SI0
SO0
SC0
XIFCS
XIFBUSY
XFRRST
VIDEO
(SEE PAGE 3-9)
IC104
SYSTEM
CONTROL
CN101
IC101
SI0
SO0
SCO
XIFCS
INT4
XFRRST
EEPROM
7 WP
39 SCL
38 SDA
7
6
5
16
46
47
49
50
60
61
XAVDIT
DREQ0
DACK0
DREQ1
DACK1
XAVDCS2
XAVDCS3
INTO
DREQ0
DACK0
DREQ1
DACK1
CS2X
CS3X
MAMUTE 83
MAMUTE
SO1 29
SC1 30
XDACS 79
48/44.1k
WP
SCL
SDA
SI0
SO0
SC0
XIFCS
IFBSY
TRST
25
26
27
51
20
76
SO1
SC1
XDACS
81
TRST
AUDIO
(SEE PAGE 3-11)
XRST
1 IC103 8
IC103
SIGNAL PROCESSOR
(SEE PAGE 3-5)
37nsec
PLL
3 IC103 qg
4 IC103 9q;
14 FSEL
29.5nsec
XTI 7
X102
27MHz
5.0Vp-p
XTO 8
15 33-1OUT
33MARP
4.4Vp-p
40.8nsec
5.0Vp-p
512FS2CH
512FS6CH
512-2OUT 9
512-1OUT 10
3 27-1OUT
27MAVD
2 IC103 3
512FSAVD
37nsec
5.5Vp-p
16
3-7
3-8
INTERFACE
CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-13)
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
3-5. VIDEO BLOCK DIAGRAM
AV-61 BOARD (1/2)
(SEE PAGE 4-33)
1 IC102 ed
J104 (2/2)
IC102
VIDEO BUFFER
VIDEO 1
V
V
15
2.5Vp-p
H
CN203 (1/2)
LINE OUT
3 VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT 33
VIDEO 2
3 IC102 wl
2.0Vp-p
J103
H
Y
19
Y
8 Y IN
Y OUT 29
Y
C
SIGNAL PROCESSOR
(SEE PAGE 3-6)
C
17
C
6 C IN
C OUT 31
2 IC102 ea
7 MUTE1
16 MUTE2
Y/G
21
Cb/R
23
Cr/B
25
Y
Cb
Cr
S VIDEO OUT
H
12 Y IN
Y OUT 24
15 Cb IN
Cb OUT 22
17 Cr IN
Cr OUT 20
1.8Vp-p
5 IC102 ws
1.4Vp-p
H
4 IC102 wf
CN103
Y
6 IC102 w;
1
2.0Vp-p
H
Cb
1.4Vp-p
H
Cr
SYSTEM CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
WIDE
24
INTERFACE CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-13)
VMUTE
1
Q104, 105
WIDE SWITCH
LINE3
CN202 (1/2)
16
3-9
3-10
3
5
11
D1 VIDEO
OUT
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
3-6. AUDIO BLOCK DIAGRAM
AV-61 BOARD (2/2)
(SEE PAGE 4-33)
MB-103 BOARD (4/4)
IC204
(SEE PAGE 4-27)
1 D IN
CN601 (3/3)
SPDIF
OPTICAL
CN203 (2/2)
16
SPDIF
J201
Q211
BUFFER
10
DIGITAL
OUT
COAXIAL
w; IC601 1
SIGNAL PROCESSOR
(SEE PAGE 3-6)
SYSTEM
CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
40.8nsec
5.2Vp-p
IC601
IC201
AUDIO D/A CONVERTER
AUDIO AMP
ACH12
3 SDTI
BCK
LRCK
2 BICK
4 LRCK
512FS2CH
XDACS
XRST
SC1
SO1
1
6
5
7
8
MCLK
CSN
PDN
CCLK
CDTI
AOUTL+ 12
AOUTL– 11
17
15
AOUTR+ 10
AOUTR– 9
21
23
ART+
ART–
J104 (2/2)
9
11
3
2
+
–
1
5
3
5
6
+
–
7
Q208
MUTE
L
AUDIO 1
Q207
MUTE
R
L
AUDIO 2
DZFL 16
22
24
MAMUTE
ALT+
ALT–
LMUTE
MAMUTE
D202
4
R
Q202, 204, 205
MUTE DRIVE
2
CN202 (2/2)
2
16
3-11
LINE OUT
3-12
A MUTE
INTERFACE
CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-13)
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
3-7. INTERFACE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
IF-89 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-9)
CN404
SYSTEM CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 3-8)
SI0
4
SO0
6
SC0
7
XIFCS
XIFBUSY
4
5
XFRRST
8
SI0
SO0
SC0
XIFCS
XIFBUSY
XFRRST
16 SO
IC406
15 SI
REMOTE COMMANDER
RECEIVER
17 /SC
IR 11
14 /CS
27 BUSY
1
OUT
7 /FRRST
CN402
AUDIO
(SEE PAGE 3-12)
A MUTE
2
23 /AMUTE
VIDEO
(SEE PAGE 3-9)
VMUTE
1
24 /VMUTE
S407
S402
S403
S405
S401
PLAY 34
IC404
IF CON
S408
O/C 35
S406
S404
SURRUND PICTURE MODE
TVS 36
ND401
FLUORESCENT
INDICATOR TUBE
34
ı
12
47
ı SEG 1 – 23
69
5
ı
11
77
ı DIG 1 – 7
71
CN401
POWER
POWER 37
XIN 2
X401
8MHz
IC405
RESET
VOUT 1
XOUT 3
8 /RST
1 IC404 3
125nsec
3.9Vp-p
16
3-13
3-14
1
SWITCHING REGULATOR
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
3-8. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)
IF-89 BOARD
SWITCHING REGULATOR
(SRV1246JUC)
(SEE PAGE 4-37)
(SEE PAGE 4-37)
T101
POWER
TRANSFORMER
D221
CN201
L221
D211
Q211
L211
6
•
CN401
EVER+11V
13
SW+11V
CN402
PS402
13
EVER–13V
5
AU+11V
3
7
SW–13V
11
3
EVER+3.3V
12
6
AI+5V
2
+5V
•
5
+11V
8
4
+3.3V
Q404, 405
PS401
7
EVER+3.3V
D311
L311
Q311
P311
12
AC IN
CN101
1
2
D101-104
F101
POWER 2
(SEE PAGE 3-17)
+5V
D314
L102
LINE
FILTER
CN403
SW+11V
6
7
IC101
SWITCH
D611
P611
L611
Q611
8
SW+3.3V
IC403
POWER 2
(SEE PAGE 3-17)
+1.8V REG
IC412
11
+3.3V REG
3 VIN
EVER+3.3V
VOUT 2
1
+1.8V
7
3.3V MNT
CN404
L512
EVER–13V
EVER+3.3V
3
D621/D622
STANDBY/ON
SW–13V
D511
Q621, 622
LED DRIVE
PC101
PHOTO COUPLER
IC611
IC406
IC407
REMOTE
COMMANDER
RECEIVER
POWER
SUPPLY
F1
ND401
FLUORESCENT
INDICATOR TUBE
F2
SHUNT REG
IC405
RESET
IC404
IF CON
Q712
POWER
CONTROL
2
SW801
1
P-CONT
POWER
2
30 PONCHK
26 PCONT
1
37 POWER
POWER
16
3-15
3-16
VKK
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
3-9. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)
AV-61 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-31 to 4-34)
CN202
AI+5V
6
IC103
–5V REG
2 IN
IC102
VIDEO
BUFFER
OUT 3
Q201
POWER 1
(SEE PAGE 3-16)
5
AU+11V
IC201
Q203, 216
AUDIO AMP
7
SW–13V
IC203
+5V REG
3 IN
OUT 1
D201
EVER+3.3V
MUTE V
3
IC204
OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUT
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
CN203
1
AU+5V
MB-103 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-15 to 4-28)
IC402
FL106
IC106
FILTER
FLASH
MEMORY
+3.3V REG
IC107
or
OTP
5 VIN
VOUT 4
IC601
CN601
AUDIO
D/A CONVERTER
25
IC401
FL103
FILTER
IC104
FL404
FL102
SYSTEM
CONTROL
FILTER
FILTER
+1.8V REG
IC404
5 VIN
16M SDRAM
VOUT 4
IC403
AV DECODER
FL402
FL101
FILTER
PLL
FL403
IC101
FILTER
EEPROM
CN101
3.3V MNT
7
+3.3V
4
FILTER
FL105
FL201
+5V
2
FILTER
FILTER
CN102
POWER 1
(SEE PAGE 3-16)
FILTER
IC103
CN204
FL110
5
CN203
19
11
FL104
1
+1.8V
FILTER
IC201
IC302
DVD/CD RF AMP,
DIGITAL
SERVO
+3.3V REG
5 VIN
IC202
FOCUS/TRACKING
COIL DRIVE,
SPINDLE/SLED/
LOADING
MOTOR DRIVE
FL109
5
+11V
FILTER
IC303
16M DRAM
VOUT 4
IC301
ARP,
SERVO DSP
16
3-17
3-18
LED
VCC
MOD
INLIMIT
SENSOR
OPTICAL
DEVICE
MEMO
3-20E
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
SECTION 4
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
2
1
4
3
5
6
8
7
10
9
11
13
12
15
14
16
17
A
S
G
C
J103
S1 VIDEO OUT
Y
G
S
B
AUDIO1
R
AUDIO2
R
AUDIO1
L
AUDIO2
L
VIDEO1
VIDEO2
J104
AV-61 BOARD
LINE OUT
C
7
14
D1 VIDEO OUT
1
8
D
CN202
25P
7P
J201
DIGITAL OUT
G
+5V
1
1
+5V
N.C.
2
2
N.C.
3
D_GND_VIDEO
EUROVY
C
D_GND_VIDEO
Y
D_GND_VIDEO
Y/G
D_GND_VIDEO
Cb/R
WIDE
Cr/B
V
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
V
DISCEXT
C
DISC/EXT
ALT-
RGBSEL
12
Cr/B
GND
Cb/R
WIDE
Y/G
GND
GND
EUROVY
Y
14
GND
15
ALT-
16
RGBSEL
17
18
P_GND_SPDIF
ALT+
19
SPDIF
20
21
ART+
RMUTE
22
P_GND_2CH
23
24
ART-
MAMUTE
LMUTE
25
25P
TRK-
1
26
TRK-
TRK+
2
25
TRK+
FCS-
3
24
FCS-
FCS+
4
23
FCS+
N.C
5
22
N.C
6
21
CD LD
7
20
N.C
DVD LD
8
19
DVD LD
LD GND
9
18
LD GND
SW/N.C
10
N.C
CN406
LED PORT
26P
26P
CN601
CN402
CN203
CD LD/N.C
3P
D301
OPTICAL PICK-UP
UNIT
FF-206
HARNESS
FL-126 BOARD
CN301
AU+5V
1
ND401
FLUORESCENT
INDICATOR TUBE
OPTICAL
B to B
V_MUTE
2
A_MUTE
3
EVER+3.3V
5
4
GND
AU+11V
6
AI+5V
(FOR AF-121
HARNESS)
F
SW-13V
7
AF-121
HARNESS
11
SPDIF
P_GND_SPDIF
ALT+
9
10
P_GND_AUDIO
RMUTE
6
8
ART+
7
ART-
LMUTE
5
VMUTE
1
MAMUTE
A_MUTE
2
4
EVER+3.3V
3
3
D_GND_VIDEO
4
2
AU+11V
5
AU+5V
AI+5V
6
CN203
IC204
1
SW_-13V
7
E
COAXIAL
3
3P
CN404
CN101
9P
LED PORT
SOO
1
1
SO0
GND
2
2
GND
MOD 11
9P
(DVD LED)
S401-408
(STOP),
I
(NEXT),
(PLAY),
J
K
13P
13
13
+11V(AUDIO)
+5V
12
12
+5V
EVER+3.3V
11
11
EVER+3.3V
D_GND
10
10
D_GND
D_GND
9
9
D_GND
SW+3.3V
8
8
SW+3.3V
SW+11V
7
7
SW+11V
SW+11V
6
6
SW+11V
M_GND
5
5
M_GND
M_GND
4
4
M_GND
EVER-13V
3
3
EVER-13V
3
SC0
4
4
SI0
XIFBUSY
5
5
XIFBUSY
XIFCS
6
6
XIFCS
3.3V_MNT
7
7
3.3V_MNT
XFRRST
8
8
XFRRST
GND
9
9
GND
MB-103 BOARD
(O/C)
CN405
1
XFRRST
2
XIFBUSY
3
XIFCS
4
SIO
5
CN204
6
SC0
7
GND
8
CN101
2P
GND
IFRST
9
10
CN102
(FOR MF-128 HARNESS)
1
1
+1.8V
+5V
2
2
+5V
GND
3
3
GND
4
4
+3.3V
SW+3.3V
2
AC_IN(N)
P-CONT
2
2
P-CONT
+11V
5
5
+11V
1
AC_IN(L)
P-DET
1
1
POWER
M_GND
6
6
M_GND
IF-89 BOARD
VR
PD
14
13
GND
E
15
12
E
D
16
11
D
C
17
10
C
G
DVD/CD
PD IC
18
9
19
8
VCC
VC
20
7
VC
GND
21
6
GND
RF
22
5
RF
F
23
4
F
A
24
3
A
B
25
2
B
H
26
1
H
SPM+
9
1
SPM+
SPM-
8
2
SPM-
FOCUS/TRACKING
COIL
9P
CN403
+1.8V
MOD
15
14
INLIM
PCONT
SW
16
(FOR CHECK)
6P
CN201
AC IN
100V 50/60Hz
13
17
9P
13P
SOO
PD
FMM-041
FLAT CABLE
G
10P
3.3V_MNT
12
VCC
PICTURE MODE,
SURROUND,
CN401
+11V(AUDIO)
3
SIO
(PREV),
PF-127
HARNESS
SWITCHING REGURATOR
(SRV1246JUC)
CN201
(PAUSE),
SCO
B to B
H
VR
MF-128
HARNESS
7
GND
6
FMO-004
FLAT CABLE
3
INLIM
4
GND
LED
5
5
LED
SLA-
4
6
SLA-
SLB-
3
7
SLB-
SLB+
2
8
SLB+
SLA+
1
9
SLA+
LDM+
5
1
LDM+
LDM-
4
2
LDM-
5P
CN001
FMS-017
FLAT CABLE
GND
3
CKSW1
2
4
CKSW1
OCSW1
1
5
OCSW1
3
GND
5P
M
SLED
MOTOR
M
SPINDLE
MOTOR
MS-81 BOARD
CHUCK/TRAY
DETECT
M
M001
LOADING
MOTOR
L
16
4-1
4-2
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For printed wiring boards)
• X : indicates a lead wire mounted on the component side.
• x : indicates a lead wire mounted on the printed side.
• a : Through hole.
• b : Pattern from the side which enables seeing.
(The other layers' patterns are not indicated.)
Caution:
Pattern face side:
(Side B)
Parts face side:
(Side A)
(For schematic diagrams)
• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µµF.
50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and
tantalums.
• All resistors are in ohms, 1/4 W (Chip resistors : 1 /10 W) un-less
otherwise specified.
kΩ=1000Ω, MΩ=1000kΩ.
• Caution when replacing chip parts.
New parts must be attached after removal of chip.
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, because it is damaged by the heat.
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B,
unless otherwise noted.
• 2 : non flammable resistor
• 5 : fusible resistor
• C : panel designation
•
f
: internal component.
• C : adjustment for repair.
• U : B+ Line
• V : B– Line
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
• Voltages are dc between measurement point.
• Readings are taken with a color-bar signals on DVD refer-ence
disc and when playing CD reference disc.
• Readings are taken with a digital multimeter (DC 10MW).
• Voltage variations may be noted due to normal production tolerances.
Parts on the pattern face side seen from
the pattern face are indicated.
Parts on the parts face side seen from
the parts face are indicated.
Note :
The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number
specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par
une marque 0 sont critiques
pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une
pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
When indicating parts by reference number, pleas include
the board name.
4-4
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
MB-103 BOARD
IF-089 BOARD
AV-61 BOARD
1 IC103 8
1 IC404 3
7 CN202 3
qf IC403 tj
1 IC102 ed
(CD PLAY)
125nsec
950mVp-p
4.4Vp-p
37nsec
3.9Vp-p
20ms/div
210mVp-p
8 CN202 4
2 IC103 3
H
qg IC403 tl
2 IC102 ea
(DVD PLAY)
5.5Vp-p
37nsec
3 IC103 qg
40ms/div
H
1.9Vp-p
8 CN202 4
2.5Vp-p
H
650mVp-p
1.8Vp-p
H
qh IC403 ya
3 IC102 wl
(CD PLAY)
650mVp-p
5.0Vp-p
29.5nsec
200ms/div
4 IC103 9q;
5.0Vp-p
5 IC104 tf
4.6Vp-p
30nsec
4 IC102 wf
850mVp-p
H
5 IC102 ws
(DVD PLAY)
1.4Vp-p
1.8Vp-p
60.6nsec
1.1Vp-p
H
40ns/div
6 CN202 1 (CD PB)
2.0Vp-p
H
qk IC403 yg
q; IC301 <zzz (CL301)
2.0Vp-p
H
qj IC403 yd
9 IC301 <zb/
40.8nsec
H
1.8Vp-p
H
1.2Vp-p
qa IC301 <zzc (CL302)
ql IC403 <zb, <zn/
6 IC102 w;
(CD PLAY)
1.4Vp-p
5.1Vp-p
0.2usec/div
440mVp-p
6 CN202 1 (DVD PB)
40usec/div
0.2µs/div
1.4Vp-p
qs IC403 ws
w; IC601 1
4.8Vp-p
640mVp-p
H
37nsec
40.8nsec
5.2Vp-p
40.8nsec
qd IC403 tg
7 CN202 3
(DVD PLAY)
210mVp-p
20ms/div
H
4-5
950mVp-p
4-6
WAVEFORMS
IF-089/MB-103/AV-61
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
IF-89 (IF COM) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
For printed wiring board
There are a few cases that the part printed on
this diagram isn’t mounted in this model.
IF-89 BOARD
CN401
CN402
CN403
CN404
CN405
CN406
D-8
E-7
D-6
B-3
B-3
D-7
IC403
IC404
IC405
IC406
IC407
D-6
B-7
C-8
A-4
B-6
Power block
Q404
Q405
D-7
D-8
S401
S402
S403
S404
S405
S406
S407
S408
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-4
A-2
A-4
A-2
A-8
AV-61 board
(AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)
ER-14 board
(AV AMP)
MS-81 board
(LOADING MOTOR)
FL-126 board
(LED)
IF-89 board
(IF COM)
IF COM
IF-89
4-7
MB-103 board
(DVD/CD RF AMP, SERVO,
MOTOR DRIVE, AD DECODER,
SYSTEM CONTROL,
AUDIO ADC, PLL)
4-8
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
11
12
13
14
15
17
16
19
18
+11V
M_GND
5
6
JL469
B+
B+
JL471
JL472
JL473
JL474
JL475
JL476
JL477
3P
2
GND
3
SCO
4
SIO
5
XIFBUSY
6
XIFCS
7
3.3V_MNT
8
XFRRST
9
GND
1
3.3V_MNT
2
XFRRST
3
XIFBUSY
4
XIFCS
5
SIO
6
SOO
7
SC0
8
GND
9
IFRST
10
PCONT
TO MB-103 BOARD(7/7)
CN101
JL478
(SEE PAGE4-28)
CN405
10P
FOR
CHECK
JL410
(PLAY)
(NEXT)
(PREV)
1.5
3.3
3.4
R407 33
(PAUSE)
2
JL435 SEG5
6
1.3
-5.2
7
-11.9
-11.9
-11.9
-10.0
-10.0
-10.0
-10.0
9
SEG4
SEG5
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
N.C
DIG7
DIG6
DIG5
DIG4
DIG3
SEG12
JL412
JL432
3.3
JL413
JL415
3.4
3.4
R413
10k
C412
XX
SEG13
/STOP
SEG14
SELF_CHECK
IC404
IR
SEG15
SEG16
IF COM
N.C
SEG17
IC404
TMP86CK74F
N.C
SEG18
/CS
SEG19
SI
SEG20
SO
SEG21
/SC
SEG22
SEG23
N.C
PDET
N.C
MODE
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
/AMUTE
N.C
/VMUTE
N.C
STATUS
3.5
PCONT
3.5
BUSY
3.5
SEL0
3.5
SEL1
2.7
PONCHK
0
AN11
0
AN6
PS402
0.7A
R426
10k
/RST
SEG6
SEG2
-9.6
JL437
SEG7
SEG3
-11.9
JL438
SEG8
SEG4
-0.9
JL439
SEG9
SEG5
-5.3
JL440
SEG10
SEG6
-7.4
JL441
SEG11
SEG7
-7.4
JL442
SEG12
SEG8
-7.4
JL443
SEG13
SEG9
-5.3
JL444
SEG14
SEG10
-11.9
JL445
SEG15
SEG11
-9.7
JL446
SEG16
SEG12
-11.9
JL447
SEG17
SEG13
-0.9
JL448
SEG18
SEG14
-5.3
JL449
SEG19
SEG15
-11.9
JL450
SEG20
SEG16
-9.6
JL451
SEG21
SEG17
JL452
SEG22
SEG18
SEG23
SEG19
-9.7
-9.7
-0.3
JL453
JL454
SEG20
JL455
SEG21
-0.5
SEG22
JL457
SEG23
JL458
G6
G5
G4
G3
G2
G1
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13
ND401
JL431 SEG2
JL434 SEG4
JL430 SEG1
JL429
JL428
JL426
JL424
JL422
JL433 SEG3
1
DIG1
DIG2
DIG3
DIG4
DIG5
DIG6
DIG7
JL419
JL421
JL420
-10.0
/FRRST
JL436
G7
FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE
3.5
F1
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18
P19
P20
P21
P22
P23
JL459
R452
XX
GREEN
F2
F2
VKK
S407
S405
S403
S401
(STOP)
SEG11
VREF
R432
10k
JL414
1.0A
SEL2
AVSS
Q405
UN2111-TX
SWITCH
SEG10
POWER
R428
100
R417
1800
PS401
VDD
3.5
3.1
H
SEG9
TVS
R412
2700
R409
3900
TEST
0
3.4
S402
C406
XX
R416
1800
-10.0
5
C413
XX
R406
8200
SEG8
3.4
R415
10k
R418
120
-11.3
1
XOUT
3.5
R431 XX
R421
XX
-12.0
SEG7
0
JL411
-12.0
XIN
-11.9
38 37
R429
10k
C411
0.01u
B
R430
10k
X401
8MHz
R405
22k
C407
0.01u
B
Q404
2SD1766-T100-QR
SWITCH
SEG6
1.6
C408
100u
16V
I
VSS
*
C409
0.01u
B
3.5
DIG2
SURROUND
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
PICTURE
MODE
C414
0.01u
B
G
-10.0
SEG1
ET402
XX
O/C
F
DIG1
PLAY
+1.8V REG
DIG2
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
C419
XX
C417
0.01u
B
3.5
DIG3
DIG1
B-
C416
100u
25V
DIG5
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
VCC
C425
22u
25V
DIG6
8
B+
F1
DIG7
DIG4
BNRKEY
IC403
R411
2700
R410
XX
C421
22u
25V
0.1
GND
1.8
Vout
3.5
Vin
R414
10k
DVD LED
IC403
LMS8117ADTX-1.8/NOPB
JL418
C403
XX
JL416
C404
0.01u
B
B+
1
E
C418
0.01u
B
B+
2
FF-206
HARNESS
R458
22k
3
3
4
LED PORT
5
LED PORT
6
3
B TO B
SOO
B+
7
2
8
1
N.C
9
+5V
N.C
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
+5V
2
S406
1
S404
CN406
3P
S409
XX
D301
EB3804X-TP
CN301
1
LED
R301
220
2
D
3
FL-126
BOARD
R448
100
20
9P
1
JL470
R442
100
R443
100
R444
100
R445
100
R446
100
R447
100
JL468
SW+3.3V
4
TO MB-103 BOARD
CN202
GND
3
JL479
+5V
FOR MF-128 HARNESS
+1.8V
2
V_MUTE
1
10
CN404
1
A_MUTE
2
CN403
EVER+3.3V
3
B+
JL466
GND
4
JL465
AU+11V
5
C405
0.01u
B
B+
JL463
AI+5V
FOR AF-121 HARNESS
SW-13V
6
JL462
JL461
JL460 CN402
B-
C
B+
B
7
NO MARK:PB MODE
* :Cannot be measured
JL467
TO AV-61 BOARD
CN202
IF COM
-REF.NO.:3000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
9
8
B+
IF-89 BOARD
A
7
(SEE PAGE4-28)
6
5
(SEE PAGE4-32)
4
JL464
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-7 for printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-5 for waveform.
2
3
1
R408
10k
-12.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
0
R438
10k
D402
XX
C423
0.01u
B
IC405
S-80830ANUP-EDT-T2
GND
3.5
VCC
3.5
VOUT
2
1
C401
47u
16V
3.5
C402
0.01u
B
3
3.4
13
M_GND
R424
10k
RED
S408
(OPEN/CLOSE)
R401
47
13P
POWER
3
CN401
GP1UD24SYK
C420
0.01u
B
R457
XX
B+
12
+5V
11
+11V(AUDIO)
B+
10
9
D_GND
D_GND
8
EVER+3.3V
7
SW+11V
SW+3.3V
B+
6
B+
5
4
M_GND
3
SW+11V
2
P-CONT
EVER-13V
1
B-
B+
IC406
R437
XX
RESET
REMOTE COMMANDER
RECEIVER
POWER
K
IC405
R460
10k
IC406
R436
10k
R439
XX
JL409
JL408
JL407
JL406
JL405
JL404
JL403
JL402
JL401
J
R441
10k
R425
10k
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
JL417
2
1
R434
100k
R402
100k
C415
0.001u
B
B+
L
TO SWITCHING REGURATOR
R455
(SEE PAGE4-42)
R453
10
120
R456
IC407
AN13990-NML
120
0.1u
C427
1
16
Note :
The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number
specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par
une marque 0 sont critiques
pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une
pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
4-9
C424
0.1u
B
7
-5.7
2.2
R459
6
-12.0
-6.9
0
5
DC/DC CONVERTER
2
3
IC407
4
JL425
-11.0
M
8
JL423
C428
0.1u
B
C426
0.01u
4-10
IF COM
IF-89
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
MB-103 (DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO, MOTOR DRIVE, SERVO, AV DECODER, SDRAM, SYSTEM CONTROL,
AUDIO DAC, PLL) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
MB-103 BOARD (SIDE A)
CN101
CN102
CN103
CN201
CN203
CN204
CN601
A-3
A-1
A-4
A-2
C-1
B-1
D-1
IC104
IC301
IC302
IC402
IC403
IC601
B-4
A-2
B-2
D-5
C-4
D-3
RV401
D-4
•
: Uses unleaded solder.
Power block
AV-61 board
(AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)
ER-14 board
(AV AMP)
MS-81 board
(LOADING MOTOR)
FL-126 board
(LED)
IF-89 board
(IF COM)
MB-103 board
(DVD/CD RF AMP, SERVO,
MOTOR DRIVE, AD DECODER,
SYSTEM CONTROL,
AUDIO ADC, PLL)
For printed wiring board
There are a few cases that the part printed
on this diagram isn’t mounted in this model.
DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO, MOTOR DRIVE, SERVO, AV DECODER, SDRAM, SYSTEM CONTROL, AUDIO DAC, PLL
MB-103
4-12
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
•
4-13
MB-103 BOARD (SIDE B)
: Uses unleaded solder.
IC101
IC103
IC106
IC201
IC202
IC303
IC401
IC404
A-1
B-3
B-1
C-4
B-4
A-3
B-2
C-2
Q201
Q202
C-5
D-5
DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO, MOTOR DRIVE, SERVO, AV DECODER, SDRAM, SYSTEM CONTROL, AUDIO DAC, PLL
MB-103
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-11 for printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-5 for waveforms.
2
1
4
3
5
6
MB-103 BOARD(1/7)
CN202
DVD/CD RF AMP DIGITAL SERVO
A
6
8
7
9
10
11
12
13
15
14
16
17
7
XX
-REF.NO.:1000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
RF
1
GND
2
FE
FE
3
TE
4
PI
5
TE
NO MARK:PB MODE
PI
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
B
Y
8
AUDIO
SIGNAL
Y/CHROMA
B+
B+
CHROMA
GND
+5V
1
TO(7/7)
2
TO(7/7)
3
TO(3/7)
4
TO(2/7)
5
TO(2/7)
6
TO(6/7)
+3.3V
B+
PB
B+
RFMON
SIGNAL PATH
SPINDLE SERVO (SPEED AND PHASE)
C241
0.1u
B
C
FL201
TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV
SLED SERVO DVD/CD
C244
0.1u
B
C251
0.1u
B
C247
0.01u
B
C252
0.1u
B
C248
0.01u
B
R211
100
R260
12k
C255
0.1u
B
C260
0.01u
B
C263
10u
16V
FOCUS SERVO
RF+
D
C253
0.001u
SSCK
SSCK
SSWD
SSRD
3.4
0.6
3.2
SSWD
3.3
2.1
2.2
3.3
3.3
2.4
2.7
26P
4.8
CN203
26P
4.1
CN203
4.1
OPTICAL DEVICE
3.6
C201
0.01u
B
C202
0.01u
B
3.6
BASE UNIT
KHM-270AAA/Z-NP
SSRD
SSCS
H
1
H
H
26
2
B
B
25
3
A
A
24
4
F
F
23
5
RF
RF
22
SSCS
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
R235
100
R244
1k
C236
560p
10
DVD_LD
2.5
A
CD_LD
FCS+
4
FCS-
FCS-
3
TRK+
TRK+
2
26
TRK-
TRK-
1
JL202
FCS-
JL204
TRK+
JL205
TRK-
M
SLA+
1
8
SLB+
SLB+
2
7
SLB-
6
SLA-
5
LED
4
GND
3
INLIM
2
SPM-
1
SPM+
SENSOR
M
JL206
SLA+
INLIMIT
I
9P
9
FLAT CABLE
SLED MOTOR
FMO-004
H
CN204
SLB-
3
SLA-
4
LED
5
GND
6
INLIM
7
SPM-
8
SPM+
9
RX
V33
TPA
MEV
VNA
FNN
FNP
DIP
DIN
BYP
1
2
3.4
SSCK
3.4
SSWD
3.4
SSRD
MIRR
TZC
TZC
SSDFCTI
SSDFCTI
0
3.2
1.7
SS_MON
R266 C224
XX
XX
C262
0.1u
B
FE
TE
1.7
C265 0.1u
B
2.5
1.7
R273
0
SVC
R272
XX
C269
XX
0
3.0
1.8
0
2.6
C264
0.01u
B
0
SSDFCTI
MIRR
C267
XX
SVC
FCS+
FCS+
R263
2.2M
R209
XX
SLB+
JL208
SLB-
JL209
R234
33
R265
27k
JL213
4.5
R245
47k
DVD LD DRIVE
3.8
DVD_LD
CD_LD
2.2
L201
47uH
C234
47u
6.3V
D201
XX
C221
10u
16V
R249
33
R248
33
R246
100
4.8
Q202
2SB1132-T100-QR
SLA+
B
SLA+
SLB+
SLB+
SLBSLBSLA-
R251
47k
C235
0.01u
B
D202
XX
0.5
C238
10u
16V
SPM-
C242
47u
6.3V
SPMSPM+
SPM+
4.8
CD LD DRIVE
SPMSPM+
TRK-
SLA-
R236
33
Q201
2SB1132-T100-QR
INLIM
TRK+
TRK-
B+
SLA-
R206
4700
C257
0.047u
FCSTRK+
C254
0.01u
B
JL210
JL212
C256
0.047u B
SLA+
JL207
JL211
C245
0.01u
B
C239
XX
R247
XX
FCS-
R264
100k
L202
47uH
R256
100
XLDON
C243
0.01u
B
16
MB-103 (1/7)
INLIM
PI
R267 XX
C266
0.01u
B
SPINDLE MOTOR
DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO
INLIM
TZC
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
R210
330
9P
MIRR
FCS+
JL203
C261
330p
CN204
SSCS
R268
XX
G 2.5
25
0
B+
FCS+
MIRR
MLPF
24
5
F
MB
23
N.C
BYP2
2.6
N.C.
6
2.5
PII
E
2.4
22
CD LD
F
PI
B
A
MP
TRACKING
COIL
G
CD LD
2.5
TZC
G
FOCUS
COIL
21
E
C
MIN
7
2.5
VCI
DFT
0
8
N.C
B
D2
D
2.2
9
DVD LD
N.C.
2.5
TE
TZIN
MEVO
LD GND
DVD LD
20
C
FE
2.5
LD GND
19
2.5
IC201
SP3728ACB
TPH
LDON
18
2.5
DVD/CD RF AMP
DIGITAL SERVO
0
SW/N.C
B
D
B2
C2
CDLD
SW/N.C.
R212
100
2.5
4.8
11
2.5
B
DVDLD
12
B
3.8
17
VR
MOD
JL201
CN
A2
LDSELO
MOD
13
2.5
VNB
VR
16
14
PD
B
4.7
15
GND
C210
2200p
C211
2200p
C212
2200p
C213
2200p
E
MON
IC201
3.4
D
CDPD
PD
15
0.2
GND
14
16
E
DVDPD
13
D
WPP
0.2
E
SRD
VPB
D
12
17
SWD
WIN
1.3
4.8
11
C
CP
1.3
5
C
FMM-041
FLAT CABLE
10
C237
XX
VC
18
2.5
19
G
SCLK
3.4
H
VCC
RFIN
3.3
3
G
C233
4700p
B
4
VCC
9
20
6
8
VC
SDEN
H 2.5
LD MODULE
SIGO
FE
RFIP
7
VC
21
8
7
GND
9
GND
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
6
C
F
AIP
TE
3.3
G
DVD/CD
PI
TE
FE
PD IC
E
VPA
C232
4700p
B
PI
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
F
AIN
A
DVD/CD
ATON
ATOP
B
4-15
4-16
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-11 for printed wiring board.
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
MB-103 BOARD(2/7)
MOTOR DRIVE
A
+3.3V
B+
SPINDLE SERVO (SPEED AND PHASE)
TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV
7 TO(7/7)
R259
10k
R201
XX
TRMM
TRMP
R280
XX
C215
100p
R239
33k
CL201
R255
56k ± 0.5%
5.1
3.4
1.7
1.7
PS
DO1+
TRK+
DO2+
DO2-
IN2+
1.7
PGND1
IN2-
1.7
C227
XX
CL202
OUT2
DO3+
1.7
IN3+
DO3-
IN3-
DO4+
OUT3
DO4-
IN4+
DO5+
SLA+
FCS-
SLA+
TRK+
5.1
5.2
C270
0.01u
B
SLB+
SLB-
R275
XX
SLB-
5 TO(1/7)
SLA-
C231 XX TRK-
SLASPM-
R276
XX
SPM-
5.1
C274
XX
SLA+
5.3
SLA-
5.1
SLB+
SPM+
SPM+
51
8
1.7
R240
33k
1.7
R227
120k
R224
270k
R226
470k
C218
1500p
C230
4700p
B
R233
470k
C220
0.1u
B
R243
470k
SPM-
6.5
SPM+
C272
0.1u
B
5.1
LDM+
TSD-M
23
DO6-
C273
0.1u
B
24
LDM-
5.1
22
PVCC2
TSD-M
MUTE5
21
3.4
20
10.5
19
SLB-
3.7
MUTE5
MUTE34
MUTE12
50
18
DO6+
D
MUTE34
3.4
SGND
REV
17
3.4
16
3.4
FWD
CTL
15
3.4
14
0
1.7
R225
10k
G
13
OUT5
IN5-
C219
0.1u
B
MDSO
-
5.2
D
+
MUTE12
C229
0.001u
B
R231
680k
IN5+
1.4
C214
0.015u
9 TO(3/7)
DO5PGND2
OUT4
3.4
1.7
MDPO
IN4-
SW
R242
220k
1.7
CL205
R229
10k
CL204
MSC
R241
33k
11
1.7
SLDB
12
R223
56k
SLDA
10
9
SLE
30
7
1.7
CL203
TDRV-
29
C228
0.001u
B
R222
56k
TDRV+
F
R258
XX
5.2
R270
XX
C276
XX
FDRV-
E
TRK-
C223
XX
28
SPFG
4 TO(1/7)
FCSTRK+
49
FDRV+
FCS-
DO1-
OUT1
1.7
TSENSD
TSENSO
SVC
SLB+
C225
100p
R238
33k
R237
XX
10 TO(7/7)
M_GND
TRK-
POWER SAVE
IN1-
1.7
C217
XX
R228
XX
+11V
FCS+
37
6
OCSW2
38
27
TSENSU
R202
XX
R203
XX
R204
XX
R205
XX
39
40
26
8 TO(6/7)
R221
150k
41
25
DSENS
D
R220
150k
42
36
11
1.7
52
35
10
TMM
C226
220p
43
34
DSENS
R230
33k
B
44
33
9
R219
120k
45
32
8
TMP
NOT USE
B+
JL248
FCS+
31
TSENS
C205
XX
C206
XX
C207
XX
C208
XX
C209
XX
46
PVCC1
7
C271
47u
16V
FCS+
47
OPOUT2
OCSW2
MOTOR DRIVE
48
OPIN2-
6
IC202
FAN8034L
OPIN2+
C
GND
IC202
LDM+
R208
XX
JL247
C222
XX
R257
XX
1.7
5
4.8
4
LDM+
C259
0.001u
B
VREF
LDM-
LDM+
3.2
LDM-
1
LDM-
SVCC
2
M001
LOADING MOTOR
R207
100
3.4
3
3.4
GND
OPIN1-
GND
2
1.7
3
CKSW1
IN1+
CKSW1
1
1
4
OCSW1
C246
0.033u
B
C240
0.033u
B
C216
220p
R218
120k
R216
1k OCSW1
R217
1k CKSW1
2
OCSW1
C203
0.001u B
C204
0.001u B
OPIN1+
5P
FOCUS SERVO
R262
330
3
5
M
CN201
5P
S001
SLED SERVO DVD/CD
R261
10k
R253
56k ±0.5%
R232
33k
R271
XX
R274
XX
R215
XX
R213
10k
R214
10k
MS-81 BOARD
C249
0.01u
B
B+
OPOUT1
+5V
R254
100k
±0.5%
10.5
R250
100k
±0.5%
B+
4
GND
C258
0.01u
B
5
NO MARK:PB MODE
CHUCK/TRAY
DETECT
18
SIGNAL PATH
B+
-REF.NO.:1000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
B
17
C268
XX
R269
10k
TSD
R252
33k
11 TO(3/7)
SPMUTE
C250
0.01u
B
OCSW1
LMCTL
CKSW1
LMP
XDRVMUTE
OCSW1
12 TO(6/7)
CKSW1
LMM
H
16
4-17
4-18
MOTOR DRIVE
MB-103 (2/7)
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-11 for printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-5 for waveforms.
2
3
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
MB-103 BOARD(3/7)
SERVO
A
-REF.NO.:1000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:PB MODE
FL302
XX
R351
0
B+
+1.8V
R301
0
(2012)
B+
R302
0
(2012)
SDCK
RAMD8
RAMD9
RAMD10
RAMD11
RAMD12
RAMD13
RAMD15
RAMD14
XSHD
XSRQ
SDEF
XSAK
RAMA0
RAMA1
RAMA2
RAMA3
RAMA4
RAMA5
RAMA6
RAMA7
RAMA8
RAMA9
SDI0
SDI1
SDI2
SDI3
CDDOUT
C340
0.01u
B
CL308
C311
0.01u
B
R327
10k
± 0.5%
R360 100
B+
XRST
15
IC303
TO(4/7,6/7,7/7)
16M D RAM
SSWD
A4
ADC4
A3
3.2
RAMD0
1.7
JL328
C343
0.01u
B MDPO
JL329
MDSO
3.1
JL330
2.8
JL331
JL332
XWAIT
JL333
XARPCS
JL334
XARPIT
JL335
XRD
JL336
17
TO(6/7)
XWRH
JL337
XSDPCS
XSDPIT
1
2
TDI
3
3.3V
4
TDO
5
GND
6
TCK
7
GND
16
SERVO
MB-103 (3/7)
8
EMU0
9
EMU1
10
TMS
HD8
JL302
XFRRST
HD9
JL303
B+
JL304
21
JL305
HD11
TO(6/7)
HD12
CDLRCK/TDOKT
R304
XX
JL306
HD10
TDIKT
TCK
R308
XX
FDRV-
MDPO
TESTK3
MDSO
FDRV+
FDRV-
C344
0.01u
B TESTK2
FDRV+
3.4
0
0.3
RAMA1
0.5
RAMA2
0.3
RAMA3
0.3
3.4
I/O7
I/O8
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
LCAS
WE
UCAS
RAS
OE
N.C
A9
N.C
A8
A0
A7
A1
A6
A5
A2
A3
A4
GND
VDD
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
1
2
I/O9
RAMD13
2.8
RAMD12
2.8
RAMD11
2.8
RAMD10
2.8
RAMD9
2.8
RAMD8
3.0
3.0
0.3
RAMA9
0.3
RAMA8
0.3
RAMA7
0.3
RAMA6
0.3
RAMA5
0.3
RAMA4
TDRV-
TDRV+
FDRVFDRV+
TDRVTDRV-
JL340
TDRV+
0
TESTK1
JL341
SLE
SLE
TDRV+
9
TO(2/7)
SPFG
SPFG
SLDA
SLDA
0
TESTK0
SLDB
SLDB
JL342
XSDPCS
LMM
JL343
XSDPIT
LMP
C345
XX
LMCTL
1.7
LMM
LMP
LMCTL
9
HA7
HA6
7
HA5
6
HA4
A2
5
18
TO(4/7,6/7)
HA3
3
A1
HA1
VSS
2
CHROMA
1k
R347
10k
R348
10k
TESTK2
1.7
1.7
0
0.7
2.7
3.4
1.7
0
3.4
2.9
2.5
2.5
2.7
TESTK1
TESTK3
SIGNAL PATH
SPINDLE SERVO (SPEED AND PHASE)
JL344
R349
10k
TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV
SLED SERVO DVD/CD
R338
XX
FOCUS SERVO
CDDATA/EMU1
R339
XX
CDBCK/EMU0
R340
XX
CDLRCK/TDOKT
TCK
TDIKT
TMS
XFRRST
CDBCK/EMU0
CDDATA/EMU1
SSCS
LMM
LMP
SSCK
SSWD
SSRD
INLIM
TZC
MIRR
SSDFCTI
LMCTL
SLDB
C339
0.01u
B
Y/CHROMA
R346
10k
TESTK0
R303
R363
XX
C337
0.01u
B
Y
PB
VDD1.8V
LRCK/TDO
VSSA5
HA0
1
A0
2.6
VIDEO SIGNAL
0
ADC7
2.8
SIGNAL PATH
HA2
3.0
9
ADC6
4
ADC5
XFRRST
TMS
TCK
TDIKT
CDLRCK/TDOKT
19
TO(4/7)
20
TO(4/7)
11
TO(2/7)
CDLRCK/TDOKT
R341
XX
R342
XX
R343
XX
R344
XX
R345
XX
XFRRST
TMS
TCK
TDIKT
CDLRCK/TDOKT
HD13
TSD
HD14
SPMUTE
CDBCK/EMU0
CDDATA/EMU1
R309
XX
4-19
I/O10
I/O6
RAMD14
3.0
MDSO
JL339
HD15
JL307
I/O11
I/O5
GND
RAMD15
2.8
MDPO
0
1.5
SLDA
M
TMS
TRST
I/O4
I/O12
3.0
XSDPIT
JL338
B+
JL301
RAMA0
C333
0.01u
B
XSDPCS
R305
XX
TO JIG
4
3.0
RAMD1
5
RAMD7
3.0
6
3.0
RAMD2
7
3.0
RAMD6
2.8
VDD
8
3.0
RAMD5
RAMD4
RAMD3
I/O13
9
RAMD4
RAMD5
2.7
2.7
I/O2
I/O3
11 10
RAMD6
3.0
1.2
33MARP
XX
3.0
I/O14
2.2
C336
XX
CN301
RAMD3
2.9
8
ADC3
B+
L
2.8
I/O15
I/O1
3.4
C341
XX
TO(7/7)
RAMD2
GND
I/O0
0.9
K
14
2.8
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
VSS
MD8
MD9
MD10
MD11
MD12
MD13
MD14
LOCK
MD15
VDD1.8V
DOUT
SDCK
XSHD
XSRQ
VSS
XRESET
VDD3.3V
SDEF
XSAK
MA0
MA1
MA2
MA3
MA4
MA5
MA6
MA7
MA8
MA9
VSS
VDD1.8V
A5
2.9
B+
2.8
RAMD1
RAMD7
133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176
SSCS
SSCS
SD0
SD2
ADC2
SSCK
SSCK
SD1
SD4
SD3
SD5
A6
SSRD
SSWD
SD6
ADC1
INLIM
SSRD
2.8
C342
XX
RAMD0
VDD
2.6
JL327
TZC
TZC
INLIM
3.4
K4F151612D-UL60T
3.4
1.2
2.9
J
C334
0.01u
B
A7
JL326
MIRR
0
C330
C318
C316
4700p
4700p
4700p
B
C317 B C320 B
4700p
0.1u
B
B
ADC0
JL325
MIRR
1.7
VDD1.8V
JL323
SSDFCTI
SSDFCTI
1.7
VRTA
JL324
TO(1/7)
JL308
TESTK0
3.4
HCS
3.4
HINT
VDDA4 3.3V
JL322
SS_MON
R335
4700
VRBA
VSSA4
3.4
SVC
3
C313
0.033u
B
VSS
VDDD2 3.3V
JL321
R325
6800
R318
470
2.3
TESTK1
1.7
PDM0
VSSD2
JL320
SPFG
1.7
VDDD1 3.3V
JL319
SLE
1.8
VSSD1
JL318
PI
1.6
TESTK2
1.7
PDM1
3.4
I
1.7
VRB
JL317
FE
3.4
VDD3.3V
JL316
TE
C319
0.01u
B
11
JL315
R313
470
R314
470
R315
470
R316
4700
R317
10k
VSSA3
TESTK3
1.7
PDM2
JL314
RF+
RFIN2
TCK
3.4
VDDA3 3.3V
TDI
3.4
VSS
1.7
PDM3
TMS
C329
0.01u
B
IC301
CXD9703R
10
CL315
H
VRT
RFIN1
TRST
3.4
VDDD0 3.3V
BCLK/EMU0
0.6
SERVO
1.6
C314
0.01u
B
C328
0.01u
B
VSSD0
1.7
R359
10k
CL302 1.6
IC301
VREF
DATA/EMU1
3.3
BIAS
VSS
2.7
CL301 1.6
VDDA2 3.3V
GIO12
0
GIO13
3.4
VSSA2
GIO11/TMC2
C325
0.01u
B
C326
0.01u
B
AOUT
VDD3.3V
3.4
GIO7/SDO
3.4
GIO8/SCK
3.4
GIO9/GREF
3.4
GIO10/FGIN
1.0
IREF
GIO5/PGIN
3.4
GIO6/SDI
2.5
VDD1.8V
2.3
MDP0
1.6
MDS0
2.8
XRAS
3.2
XCAS
3.4
XMWR
3.4
XWAT
3.4
XCS
3.4
XINT
2.7
XRD
3.4
XWR
Y
VDDA1 3.3V
GIO4/PGREF
3.3
FR3
GIO3/INT5
0.5
C323
0.01u
B
C324
0.1u
B
VSS
VSS
3.0
TZC
0
GIO0/INT2
3.4
GIO1/INT3
3.4
GIO2/INT4
1.0
MD0
FR2
CL314
R326
10k
R324
10k
3.3
C327
0.01u B
R358
10k
C305
4700p
B
1.7
MD1
FR1
CL313
C315
0.01u
B
R323
2200
C304
0.01u
B
1.7
INP
JL313
R322
1k
± 0.5%
1.7
C322
0.01u
B
R334
1800
± 0.5%
R312
220
± 0.5%
F
1.7
JL312
R321
22k
± 0.5%
G
R328
27k
R329
2200
R330
2200
R331
2200
C312
0.068u
B
MD2
JL311
CDDOUT
INM
CLKIN
SDCK
SDCK
CDDOUT
MD3
VDD1.8V
1.7
VSSA1
VSS
0
PWM2
0
DFCTI
0
MIRR
XSHD
XSHD
MD5
VDD3.3V
1.7
PWM0
1.7
PWM1
XSRQ
XSRQ
R311
100
1.7
C321
0.01u
B
MD6
MD4
D6
XSAK
XSAK
E
R320
33k
± 0.5%
SDEF
D7
SDI7
SDEF
D5
SDI7
TO(4/7)
D4
SDI6
16
MD7
D3
R332
2200
R333
150k
VDD3.3V
D2
SDI6
VSSA0
1.7
VCO
0.7
R1
2.4
R2
3.3
VDDA0 3.3V
D1
SDI5
SDI5
D0
SDI4
SDI4
VDDA5 3.3V
C310
100p
132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89
SDI3
SDI3
SD7
SDI2
SDI2
JITPWM
SDI1
D
PLCKO
VSS
SDI1
RFD
SDI0
IC303
3
C332
0.01u
B
88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45
SDI0
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
3.0
3.0
0
0
0
0
0
3.0
1.7
CL309
1.7
1.7
3.4
2.5
3.4
3.4
2.6
3.4
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
B+
R336
10k
1.7
3.3V REG
R337
XX
C335
0.01u
B
1.5
R319
10k
± 0.5%
0.6
IC302
JL310
C309
0.01u
B
JL309
GND
C338
0.01u
B
C331
0.1u
B
1.5
VOUT
C308
100u
6.3V
C
SDI4
3.3
4
1.3
SDI5
NOISE
VIN
SDI6
GND
5
1
4.8
CONT
2
C302
XX
SDI7
IC302
MM1385ENLE
4.8
TO(7/7)
3
13
B+
B+
2.0
B
+5V
FL301
XX
R352
0
1.5
+3.3V
4-20
AUDIO
SIGNAL
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-11 for printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-5 for waveforms.
2
3
1
5
4
6
7
9
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
16
18
19
MB-103 BOARD(4/7)
A
AV DECODER
-REF.NO.:1000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
XRD
XWRH
XAVDIT
NO MARK:PB MODE
XWAIT
22 TO(6/7)
SIGNAL PATH
DACK0
VIDEO SIGNAL
HA21
HA20
HA19
HA18
HA17
HA16
HA15
HA14
HA13
HA12
HA11
HA9
HA8
HA10
HA7
HA6
HA5
HA4
HA3
HA2
DACK1
HA1
HA0
DREQ0
DREQ1
XRST
C414
XX
R405
100
R425
C423
0.01u
B
C422
0.01u
B
Y/CHROMA
AUDIO
SIGNAL
PB
C426
0.01u
B
R412
10k
B+
B+
C
R426
10k
3.4
1.7
1.8
1.7
0
0
3.4
3.4
3.4
0.8
2.6
1.5
1.8
0.5
1.9
1.0
1.5
1.1
2.1
1.7
1.9
2.2
1.0
0.8
3.4
1.4
2.6
0.9
2.3
1.4
1.5
3.0
0
2.7
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
1.7
3.4
B+
3.4
B+
3.4
C407
0.01u
B
Y
CHROMA
XX
R421
XX
R418
XX
C428
0.01u
B
3.4
7/7)
C416
0.01u
B
3.4
15 TO(3/7,6/7,
3.4
B
SDI1
2.0
SDI1
SDI2
SDI2
SDI3
1.8
SDI1
1.6
SDI2
C412
0.01u
B
SDI3
SDI3
SDI4
SDI4
SDI5
SDI5
3.4
1.5
SDI4
1.5
SDI5
SDI6
SDI6
1.7
SDI6
SDI7
SDI7
1.6
SDI7
C413
0.01u
B
1.7
1.7
SDCK
3.4
SDEF
3.4
XSHD
2.6
XSAK
2.6
XSRQ
TESTIn
CLKI
SCLKIN
PAVDD18P
PAVSS18G
MBIST_EN
SCAN_MODE
HAD23I
IOVDD11
SCAN_EN
HAD22I
HAD21I
HAD20I
CVS07
HAD19I
HAD18I
HAD17I
HAD16I
IOVSS11
HAD15I
HAD14I
HAD13I
HAD12I
CVD07
HAD11I
HAD10I
HAD8I
HAD9I
IOVDD12
HAD7I
HAD6I
HAD5I
HAD4I
CVS08
HAD3I
HAD2I
HAD1I
HAD0I
IOVSS12
HCSn
HRWn
HCPUMDI
HIRQOn
HWAITOn
CVD08
DMACK1In
DMRQ1On
DMACK0In
SDAD8O
DT5I
IOVDD06
DT6I
SDAD0O
DT7I
SDAD7O
CVD02
SDAD1O
ICLKI
SDAD6O
CVD05
SDAD2O
ISTARTIn
SDAD5O
IVALIn
IREQON
13
IOVSS02
R402
0
(2012)
14
15
16
17
18
SDAD3O
SDAD4O
1.8
3.4
HA5
HA6
ADDT15
C430
XX
HA7
HA7
HA8
2.0
HA8
ADDT1
1.9
HA9
HA9
ADDT14
HA10
HA10
1.2
HA11
HA12
2.0
HA12
ADDT13
1.9
HA13
HA13
ADDT3
2.0
2.0
ADDT12
C431
0.01u
B
32 TO(5/7)
HA14
HA14
HA15
HA15
HA16
HA16
ADDT14
1.9
HA17
HA17
ADDT11
2.0
HA18
HA18
ADDT5
HA19
1.1
1.7
1.9
30 TO(6/7)
HA11
ADDT2
3.4
18 TO(3/7)
HA4
HA6
2.2
HA19
ADDT10
C432
0.01u
B
HA20
HA20
HA21
HA21
ADDT6
2.0
ADDT9
2.2
ADDT7
1.7
ADDT8
0.1
DQML
0.1
DQMU
0
XWE
2.7
3.4
C433
XX
1.4
XCAS
R430
10
33 TO(5/7)
CLK
2.5
XRAS
3.4
3.4
CKE
C434
XX
2.6
XCS2
3.3
XCS
1.6
ADAD11
0.1
ADAD9
0.1
ADAD10
0.1
3.4
0.1
ADAD8
C435
0.01u
B
ADAD0
1.8
34 TO(5/7)
ADAD7
0.7
ADAD1
2.1
1.7
1.4
ADAD6
C436
0.01u
B
ADAD2
1.6
ADAD5
1.6
ADAD3
1.5
ADAD4
DVD7
DVD7
DVD6
3.4
2.6
0
3.4
0.8
1.7
DVD6
1.5
JL417
JL416
1.8
1.1
1.1
1.7
1.7
1.0
0.4
1.2
0.9
3.4
JL415
JL414
1.7
JL413
JL407
JL406
JL405
3.4
0.4
0.4
3.3
1.8
3.4
0.5
0.6
B+
DVD5
DVD5
DVD4
DVD4
C401
10u
16V
C403
0.01u
B
VOUT
C405
220u
4V
YOUT
DVD7
DVD6
C427
XX
R414
1200
R403
470
C450
XX
C420
0.1u
B
DVD0
DVD0
R423
10k
XFRRST
R416
XX
R420
XX
R437
XX
DVD1
C429
0.01u
B
R415
XX
DVD5
R438
XX
RV401
1k
DVD4
R411
C419
0.1u
B
DVD3
± 0.5%
± 0.5%
220
220
R410
R413
6800
C425
0.01u
B
DVD2
± 0.5%
R409
C417
0.01u
B
C424
XX
DVD1
± 0.5%
± 0.5%
220
220
R408
C415
0.01u
B
C421
XX
4
3.3
NOISE
± 0.5%
+3.3V REG
220
GND
R436
XX
220
IC402
R406
VIN
5
CONT
1.3
3
B+
2
1
4.8
R401
0
(2012)
C418
0.01u
B
4.8
IC402
MM1385ENLE
L
DVD2
DVD1
FL402
26 TO(7/7)
DVD3
DVD2
C406
10u
16V
C404
1u
50V
B+
JL402
NOT USE
DVD3
B+
R407
GND
+3.3V
C402
10u
16V
DVD0
C449
0.01u
B
+5V
HA3
HA5
ADDT0
+1.8V
K
HA2
HA3
HA4
R429
XX
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104
FL403
B+
HA1
29 TO(6/7)
33MAVD
4
1.8
VOUT
DMRQ0On
DT4I
IOAVSS00
NOISE
VIN
RSTn
SDAD10O
3.3
GND
1.3
JL401
SDAD9O
SDAD12O
IOVDD02
5
1
CONT
2
+1.8V REG
DT2I
DT3I
3.4
3
IC401
IOVSS06
IERRIn
IC401
TK11118CS
3.4
DT1I
3.3
J
SDCS1On
SDAD11O
0.6
16 TO(3/7)
CVS02
DT0I
0.6
I
SDCS0On
3.0
IOVSS05
SDI0
SDI0
CDLRKI
CVS05
2.0
IOVDD07
TRST
SDI0
CDDOUT
SDCKEO
CDBCKI
TMS
H
SDRASOn
IOVSS01
IOVDD05
1.7
CDLRCK/TDOKT
CDIN1I
TCK
1.7
CDBCK/EMU0
SDCLKO
IOVSS07
TDO
CDDATA/EMU1
19 TO(3/7)
DO
CDIN2I
TDI
0
D1CLKO
1.7
IOVDD08
IOVSS04
SPDIF1
SDCASOn
BCKO
NC
1.7
LRCKO
BF_ID
0
SDWEOn
DVO7
R439
IC403
CXD1935Q
IOVDD01
DVO6
1.7
BCK
CVS06
DVO5
LRCK
SDDQM1O
DVO4
1.7
G
ACH56O
DVO3
3.4
AD DECODER
ACH34O
CVD04
C411
XX
25 TO(7/7)
SDDQM0O
DVO2
JL404
ACH12O
IOVSS08
DVO1
JL403
SDDQ8
IC403
CVD01
DVO0
ACH12
12
ACLK
IOVDD04
0
SDDQ7
I2C_DATA
1.7
CVS01
CVS04
C410
0.01u
B
SDDQ9
I2C_CLK
1.6
512FSAVD
SDDQ6
HDATA15
IOVSS03
R404
XX
HDATA14
DSPACK1
3.0
CVD03
HD15
CVD06
DSPACK0
2.6
HDATA13
CVS03
HD14
SDDQ10
HSYNCOn
F
2.6
SDDQ5
HDATA12
FLDO
HD13
IOVSS00
IOVDD03
2.7
IREFI
HD12
VREFI
HD15
HD15
SDDQ11
3.3
HD14
HDATA11
IOAVDD00
HD14
SDDQ4
VGO
2.7
IOVDD09
HDATA10
DVDD33
HD11
HDATA9
DVSS33
2.9
COMPOUT
HD10
SDDQ3
SDDQ12
AVSS02
3.0
SDDQ13
HDATA8
COUT
HD13
HD13
HD9
HDATA7
CVD00
AVDD02
HD12
HD12
2.9
0.5
HD11
1.8
BOUT
C409
XX
HD8
SDDQ2
AVSS01
1.0
IOVSS09
HDATA6
ROUT
HD7
HDATA5
AVDD01
0.8
GOUT
HD6
SDDQ14
AVSS00
HD7
HD11
5
0.9
HD10
6
HD5
HD9
HD9
HDATA4
SDDQ1
YOUT
HD8
HD10
SDDQ15
IOVDD10
HDATA3
0.9
HD6
HD8
HDATA2
CVS00
AVDD00
HD7
HD4
SDDQ0
105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156
1.1
IOVSS10
19
1.5
HD6
24 TO(7/7)
IOVSS13
HD3
HDATA1
4
HD3
HD5
HD5
E
1.1
HD4
HD4
23 TO(6/7)
HD2
HDATA0
7
HD3
HD2
CRPCLKI
8
HD2
0.6
52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
D
HD1
2
HD1
HD1
1.1
HA0
HA1
HA2
27MAVD
9
HD0
HD0
28 TO(6/7)
XAVDCS2
IOVDD00
3
HD0
HA0
XAVDCS3
3.4
1
C408
0.01u
B
IOVDD13
208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157
R417
XX
JL408
TRST
JL409
TMS
JL410
TCK
JL411
TDI
31 TO(6/7)
XFRRST
TMS
TCK
20 TO(3/7)
TDIKT
CDLRCK/TDOKT
JL412
TDO
Y/G
M
27 TO(7/7)
CB/R
CR/B
COUT
COMPOUT
16
NOT USE
27MCLK
4-21
4-22
AV DECODER
MB-103 (4/7)
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-11 for printed wiring board.
2
1
3
MB-103 BOARD(5/7)
4
6
5
7
9
8
10
NO MARK:PB MODE
SDRAM
-REF.NO.:1000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
ADDT5
ADDT10
ADDT6
C
ADDT9
ADDT7
ADDT8
ADDT13
ADDT3
ADDT12
ADDT14
IC404
16M SDRAM
ADDT11
ADDT5
ADDT2
1.2
ADDT3
1.9
C438
0.01u
ADDT4 B
3.4
ADDT5
2.0
ADDT6
ADDT6
1.9
ADDT9
ADDT7
2.2
ADDT7
3.4
ADDT8
0.1
3.1
2.7
2.5
2.6
ADAD11
1.6
ADAD10
0.1
0.1
ADAD0
0.8
ADAD1
ADAD2
1.4
ADAD3
1.6
C439
0.01u
B
DQ15
DQ1
DQ14
VSSQ
VSSQ
DQ2
DQ13
DQ3
DQ12
VCCQ
VCCQ
2.0
ADDT10
D
VSS
DQ0
3.4
DQ4
DQ11
DQ5
DQ10
VSSQ
VSSQ
DQ6
DQ9
DQ7
DQ8
VCCQ
VCCQ
N.C.
DQML
DQMU
WE
CAS
CLK
RAS
CKE
CS
N.C.
A11(BA)
A9
A10/AP
A8
A0
A7
A1
A6
A2
A5
A4
A3
VSS
VCC
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
ADDT11
2.0
1
ADDT14
1.8
ADDT1
2
32 TO(4/7)
ADDT0
ADDT2
3
ADDT3
ADDT12
ADDT14
4
B
ADDT13
MT48LC1M16A1TG-6STR
VCC
5
ADDT2
IC404
3.4
6
ADDT14
ADDT1
7
ADDT1
C437
XX
8
ADDT15
B+
ADDT0
ADDT15
9
ADDT0
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
A
2.2
ADDT15
1.9
ADDT14
ADDT13
2.0
ADDT12
2.0
3.4
1.9
C446
0.01u
B
ADDT11
1.1
ADDT10
2.0
ADDT9
1.7
ADDT8
3.4
0.1
1.4
3.4
0.1
ADAD9
0
ADAD8
1.8
ADAD7
2.2
ADAD6
1.6
ADAD5
1.5
ADAD4
B+
E
B+
GND
35 TO(7/7)
+3.3V
IC405
C440
XX
XX
VSS
2
DQ0
DQ15
3
DQ1
DQ14
4
VSSQ
VSSQ
5
DQ2
DQ13
6
DQ3
DQ12
7
VCCQ
VCCQ
8
DQ4
DQ11
9
DQ5
DQ10
VSSQ
VSSQ
ADDT0
ADDT1
ADDT2
ADDT3
C441
XX
F
ADDT4
ADDT5
DQML
ADDT6
DQMU
ADDT7
XWE
XCAS
CLK
XRAS
CKE
XCS2
XCS
ADAD5
ADAD3
ADAD4
C442
XX
ADAD1
A9
A10/AP
A8
A0
A7
A1
A6
A2
A5
A3
A4
VCC
VSS
ADDT15
ADDT14
ADDT13
ADDT12
C447
XX
ADDT11
ADDT10
ADDT9
ADDT8
ADAD9
ADAD8
ADAD7
ADAD6
ADAD5
ADAD4
ADAD6
B+
ADAD2
IC406
ADAD5
C443
XX
ADAD3
XX
VDD
VSS
DQ0
DQ15
VDDQ
VSSQ
DQ1
DQ14
DQ2
DQ13
VSSQ
VDDQ
DQ3
DQ12
DQ4
DQ11
VDDQ
VSSQ
DQ5
DQ10
DQ6
DQ9
ADDT0
ADAD4
I
ADDT1
ADDT2
ADDT3
ADDT4
C444
XX
ADDT5 B
ADDT6
J
ADDT7
K
ADAD11
ADAD10
R431
XX
ADAD0
ADAD1
ADAD2
ADAD3
C445
XX
B
L
VSSQ
VDDQ
DQ7
DQ8
VDD
VSS
LDQM
WE
CAS
N.C.
UDQM
CLK
RAS
LKE
CS
N.C.
BA0
A11
BA1
A9
A10/AP
A8
A0
A7
A1
A6
A2
A5
A3
A4
VDD
VSS
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
ADAD2
ADAD3
A11(BA)
1
ADAD6
ADAD7
N.C.
2
ADAD1
ADAD0
ADAD2
CKE
CS
3
34 TO(4/7)
ADAD8
ADAD1
CLK
RAS
4
ADAD7
ADAD0
DQMU
CAS
5
H
ADAD0
ADAD10
N.C.
WE
6
ADAD8
ADAD10
DQML
7
ADAD10
ADAD9
VCCQ
VCCQ
8
ADAD9
ADAD11
DQ8
9
ADAD11
ADAD11
DQ9
DQ7
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
33 TO(4/7)
G
DQ6
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
1
VCC
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
FL404
ADDT15
ADDT14
ADDT13
C448
XX
B
ADDT12
ADDT11
ADDT10
ADDT9
ADDT8
ADAD9
ADAD8
ADAD7
ADAD6
ADAD5
ADAD4
16
SDRAM
MB-103 (5/7)
4-23
4-24
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-11 for printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-5 for waveform.
2
3
1
4
6
5
7
8
10
9
11
13
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
MB-103 BOARD(6/7)
SYSTEM CONTROL
-REF.NO.:1000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
GND
36 TO(7/7)
+3.3V
B+
B+
+1.8V
FL106
IC106
IPSW
XAVDIT
HA0
FLASH MEMORY
IC106
B
HA0
MBM29LV160BE-90TN
HA1
R123
10k
3.4
3.4
3.4
DACK1
R124
10k
G
3.4
3.1
R125
R113
22k
XX
1
1.7
2
1.6
3.4
R110 1k
3
0
2.4
R126
XX
R127
XX
X101
16.5MHz
XDRVMUTE
C108
0.01u
B
CKSW1
0
3.4
3.4
OCSW1
HA17
HA13
XARPRST
HA12
RGBSEL
HA11
SDA
HA10
SCL
HA9
TRM+
HA8
EUROVY
VCC
EXT/DSEL
HA7
IC104
MD0
MD1
HA6
HA5
SYSTEM CONTROL
MD2
HA4
IC104
MB91307RPFV-G-BND-E1
DREQ0
HA3
DACK0
HA2
XDRVMUTE
HA1
DREQ1
HA0
DACK1
VSS
XIFCS
HD15
VSS
HD14
X1
HD13
5
X2
HD12
HD11
VCC
CKSW1/TSW1
HD10
OCSW1/TSW2
HD9
CS0X
HD8
CS1X
HD7
HD6
CS2X
1.4
HA14
1.2
HA13
2.1
HA12
1.8
HA11
2.2
HA10
1.1
HA9
R102
XX
XWAIT
XWRH
XRD
C122
0.01u
B
L
DACK0
DACK1
XWAIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
VSS
A2
CE
A1
A0
HA4
3.0
HA5
HD15
HA5
1.0
HD7
HA6
2.5
HD14
HA7
0.8
HD6
HA8
2.6
HD13
HA9
0.9
HD5
HA10
2.7
HD12
HA11
0.9
HD4
HA12
3.4
C129
0.01u
B HD11
HA13
1.0
HD3
HA15
2.9
HD10
HA16
1.0
HD2
HA17
2.9
HD9
HA18
0.6
HD1
HA19
2.9
HD8
HA20
1.0
HD0
HA21
HA6
HA7
HA8
HA9
HA10
HA11
2.7
30 TO(4/7)
HA12
HA13
HA14
HA14
HA15
HA16
HA17
HA18
HA19
HA20
HA21
2.7
HD0
2.6
HD0
HD1
3.0
HA1
HD1
HD2
XX
HD4
3.4
HA21
A18
A17
A7
A9
A6
A10
A19
A8
HA8
HA7
HA7
2.6
HA6
HA6
0.8
HA5
HA5
1.2
N.C.
HA18
HA4
2.2
HA3
1.4
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
CS
I/O0
I/O15
I/O1
I/O14
I/O2
I/O13
I/O3
I/O12
VCC
GND
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A0
A16
CE
BYTE
HA4
HA3
1.5
HA2
HA2
3.0
HA1
HA1
0
HA0
3.0
HD15
2.5
HD14
HD0
2.5
HD13
HD8
2.7
HD12
2.6
HD11
HD9
2.8
HD10
HD2
3.0
HD9
FL108
XX
HD1
HD10
2.9
HD8
HD3
1.0
HD7
HD11
0.7
HD6
VSS
VSS
OE
D15/A-1
D0
D7
D8
D14
D1
D6
D9
D13
D2
D5
D10
D12
D3
D4
D11
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
1
VCC
IC108
HA21
HD5
HA20
HD6
HA9
HD7
HD5
23 TO(4/7)
HD6
HD7
HA10
HD8
HA11
HD9
HA12
HD10
HA13
HD11
HA14
HD12
HA15
HD13
HD8
HD9
HD10
HD11
21 TO(3/7)
HD12
HD13
HA16
HD14
HA17
HD15
HD14
HD15
R184
10k
HD15
HD7
HD14
HD6
HD13
HD5
HD12
HD4
R144
XX
XX
UB
LB
HD0
HD3
HD3
HD2
HD1
HD4
HD0
HD5
HD6
RGBSEL
HA15
EUROVY
HA14
EXT/DSEL
HA13
GND
VCC
I/O4
I/O11
I/O5
I/O10
I/O6
I/O9
I/O7
I/O8
WE
N.C.
A15
A8
A14
A9
A10
A13
A12
A11
N.C.
N.C.
HA6
HA7
HA8
HD15
HD14
HD13
HD12
C130
XX
HD11
HD10
HD9
HD8
HA9
HA10
HA11
HA12
SO2
SI2
SI0
SC0
SO0
SO2
SI2
SI0
SC0
SO0
R107
XX
XRD
39 TO(7/7)
XIFBUSY
XWRH
XAVDIT
DACK0
OE
HA1
HA16
DREQ1
A7
HA2
1
WIDE
DREQ0
A6
HA3
10
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
100
R151 R155
XX
XX
R188
XX
A5
HA4
HD4
R105
R117
1k
RB101
6
XX
HA5
6
10k
IPSW
XLDON
DREQ1
A3
HA19
HD7
MA_MUTE
22 TO(4/7)
OE
HD2
FSEL
R101
XX
XWAIT
DREQ0
A4
IC107
HD5
TRMM
XSDPCS
XAVDIT
DQ0
HD1
C120
0.01u
B
C118
0.01u
B
OCSW2
XARPCS
C111
0.01u
B
XDACS
R129
100
R130
100
R131
100
R146
XX
R148
XX
XSDPIT
6 TO(1/7)
A5
18 TO(3/7,4/7)
HA3
HA4
HD3
HA8
0.8
R170
XX
R172
XX
R142
XX
XSDPIT
EXT/DSEL
DQ8
HA3
HD4
B+
R106
100
CL101
R150
10k
R153
XX
R141
10k
R133
0
JL108
JL107
B+
XARPIT
XARPIT
EUROVY
1.5
DQ1
A6
HA2
3.4
HD3
CPUCK
3.4
OCSW2
3.4
XDACS
3.4
TRM3.4
48/44.1K
0
WIDE
3.4
MA_MUTE
3.4
SRAMWE
1.1
HD0
0.6
HD1
1.0
HD2
1.1
HD3
0.9
HD4
0.9
HD5
VSS
3.4
XFRRST
CS7X
3.4
XWAIT
3.4
BGRNTX
0
BRQ
2.6
XRD
3.4
XWRH
3.4
XWRL
3.4
NMIX
1.7
VCCI
CS6X
3.4
CS3X
3.4
CS4X
3.4
CS5X
1.7
VCCI
I
FL102
K
1.3
HA2
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
R132
0
WIDE
HA3
A7
HA2
HA17
HD2
RB102
RGBSEL
2.2
1
HA14
XRST
HA15
DQ9
2
VSS
HA4
1.0
0.8
A17
3
HA15
DSENS
HA5
DQ2
4
VSS
2.6
HA16
A18
5
HA18
HA19
HA20
HA21
WP
HA22
XSACS
AVCC
AN0
AVSS
AVRH
AN1
AN2
AN3
INT0
INT1
INT3
INT2
INT4
INT5
INT6
INT7
SI0
VCC
SO0
SC0
HA16
SO2
XAVDCS3
38 TO(7/7)
1.2
DQ10
0.5
R128
100
XAVDCS2
IPSW
HA7
RY/BY
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
3.4
R112
100
0.7
DQ3
WP/ACC
6
3.4
R111
100
HA8
DQ11
N.C.
7
3.4
EXT/DSEL
SI2
1.8
VCC
8
3.4
DREQ1
XRD
1.5
DQ4
RESET
9
3.4
EUROVY
DACK0
XWRH
0
3.4
WE
22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
3.4
DREQ0
J
3.4
1
SCL
HA18
1.8
DQ12
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
1
A20
2
0
R120
1k
R121
1k
R122
XX
3.4
17 TO(3/7)
0
3
2
DQ5
2.5
4
3
A19
DQ13
5
4
A8
DQ6
6
5
A9
7
6
DQ7
DQ14
8
7
A11
A10
7
0.5
1.8
1.5
2.5
3.4
JL109
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.2
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
R140
XX
R143
XX
R145
XX
R147
XX
R149
XX
R152
XX
R154
XX
R156
10k
R162
3300
R163
3300
R165
3300
R168
3300
3.4
3.4
3.4
R139
3.4 3300
3.4
3.4
JL128
R178
10k
HA19
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120
0
WIDE
F
28 TO(4/7)
8
DQ15/A-1
8
R175
XX
3.4
XRST
TRMP
12 TO(2/7)
3.3
R138
XX
0
SDA
SI1
SC1
3.2
60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31
3.2
RGBSEL
H
R177
XX
HA6
R118
100k
R119
100k
DSENS
NOT USE
SO1
GND SDA
5
4
TRMM
SO2
7/7)
9
A12
1.1
3.4
0.8
3.4
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
SI2
15 TO(3/7,4/7,
2.2
3.4
R109
XX
E
1.9
R187 XX
6
3.4
OCSW2
TRMM
3.4
SCL
7
2
WP
A2
TRMP
TRMP
OCSW2
D
A1
3
3.4
8 TO(2/7)
1.5
VCC
A0
2.2
HA10
HA21
B+
C109
100u
4V
VSS
1.2
HA11
HA20
8
1
IC101
M24C16-WMN6T
3.4
TSENSD
A13
1.5
HA12
HA9
TSENSD
BYTE
9
HA17
HA18
HA19
SI0
SC0
SO0
C121
0.01u
B
A16
A14
9
TSENSU
C114
0.01u
B
A15
22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
TSENSU
JL127
C102
0.01u
B
1.0
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
XARPIT
XSDPIT
R104
100
EEP ROM
HA20
TSENSO
C
R103
100
IC101
FSEL
FSEL
HA15
HA13
HA21
XDACS
TSENSO
1.9
HA14
R161
XX
R164
47k (2012)
R166
47k (2012)
R169
47k (2012)
XDACS
TSENSO
SC1
FL103
37 TO(7/7)
TSENSU
TSENSD
HA1
SO1
HA16
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
A
XIFCS
XFRRST
DACK1
XFRRST
31 TO(4/7)
XWAIT
XWRH
16
XRD
4-25
4-26
SYSTEM CONTROL
MB-103 (6/7)
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-11 for printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-5 for waveforms.
2
1
3
4
MB-103 BOARD(7/7)
A
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
PR_C
PR_Y
NOT USE
-REF.NO.:1000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
PR_Y/G
PR_CB/R
PR_CR/B
NO MARK:PB MODE
* :Cannot be measured
14
R612
0
FB602
0uH
FB603
0uH
R609
0
R608
0
R607
0
R613
XX
R614
XX
PR_V
AUDIO DAC,PLL
12
COMPOUT
COUT
YOUT
27 TO(4/7)
Y/G
CB/R
CR/B
MA_MUTE
B
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
CHROMA
RGBSEL
R621
XX
R619
XX
Y
Y/CHROMA
EXT/DSEL
WIDE
JL601
JL602
JL603
C
JL604
20
R623
XX
JL606
AUDIO D/A CONVERTER
JL607
JL608
1
MCLK
2
BICK
3
SDTI
4
LRCK
5
1.6
512FS2CH
PDN
DZFL
DZFR
VDD
1.7
BCK
0
ACH12
1.7
LRCK
15 TO(3/7,4/7,
R601
100
XRST
6/7)
VSS
3.4
AOUTL+
CSN
AOUTL-
7
CCLK
AOUTR+
8
6
3.4
XDACS
CDTI
AOUTR-
3.4
SC1
37 TO(6/7)
JL609
CXD9627A-E2
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IC601
25 TO(4/7)
JL605
IC601
SPDIF1
D
JL622
0
JL610
0
4.9
C602
0.22u
B
C603
10u
16V
JL611
JL612
C604
0.01u
B
2.5
JL613
2.5
JL614
2.5
JL615
JL616
2.5
9
3.4
SO1
JL617
C601
0.001u
B
FSEL
JL618
JL619
JL620
JL623
F
+1.8V
36 TO(6/7)
+3.3V
35 TO(5/7)
B+
R185
1k
+3.3V
+5V
G
26 TO(4/7)
33MAVD
JL124
JL125
JL129
Cr/B
2
WIDE
3
Cb/R
4
GND
5
Y/G
6
GND
7
Y
8
GND
9
C
10
DISCEXT
11
V
12
EUROVY
13
GND
14
RGBSEL
15
ALT-
16
SPDIF
17
ALT+
18
P_GND_SPDIF
19
P_GND_2CH
20
RMUTE
21
ART+
22
LMUTE
23
ART-
24
MAMUTE
25
AU+5V
6
TXD
5
RXD
4
GND
3
+3.3V
2
GND
1
RF MON
TO AV-61 BOARD
CN203
(PAGE 4-31)
B+
2 TO(1/7)
CN103
JL126
RFMON
6P
FOR CHECK
+1.8V
+3.3V
24 TO(4/7)
B TO B
25P
1
JL123
SO2
SI2
GND
33MARP
JL621
CN601
B+
GND
14 TO(3/7)
34 TO(6/7)
IPSW
AUDIO
SIGNAL
PB
E
EUROVY
SO2
SO2
GND
SI2
SI2
IC102
512FSAVD
XX
29 TO(4/7)
R108
2.2
5
R157
0
C103
100u
4V
C104
0.01u
B
IC103
1
2
JL101
JL102
4
I
2
6
5
C105
0.01u
B
8
7
C106
9p
C107
9p
XFRRST
X102 R114
27MHz
0
3.4
VDD
XIFCS
+3.3V
XIFBUSY
SI0
SC0
+5V
1 TO(1/7)
VSS
1.7
27-1OUT
27-2OUT
3.4
VDD
VSS
*
XTI
1.5
XTO
N.C
1.7
33-1OUT
3.4
FSEL
1.7
33-2OUT
3.4
VDD
VSS
0
512-1OUT
0
512-2OUT
JL103
JL104
JL105
FB103
0uH
C110 R135
0.01u XX
B
R136
22
R183
100
FL104
FB104
0uH
FL105
L101
4.7uH
JL106
R137
22
4
1
J
FB105
0uH
FB106
0uH
C113 C116 C117 C119
XX
XX
XX
XX
FB107 0uH
B+
FB109
0uH
FL109
C125
47u
4V
10 TO(2/7)
C126
100u
6.3V
C127
47u
16V
FB108
0uH
C128
220u
4V
16
4-27
JL113
JL114
JL115
JL132 JL116
B+
JL133 JL117
JL121
FB111
0uH JL134 JL118
JL135 JL119
+11V
C124
XX
MB-103 (7/7)
JL112
B+
FL110
M_GND
AUDIO DAC, PLL
JL120
JL131
+3.3V
GND
R134
22
JL110
JL130 JL111
R180
100
R186
XX
R181
0
R182
100
SO0
3
C101
XX
R179
XX
GND
3
SM8707AV-E2
SO0
SO0
+5V
C112
XX
PLL
B+
CN101
SC0
39 TO(6/7)
GND
R158 R159 R160
0
XX
0
7 TO(2/7)
IC103
SC0
+5V
+3.3V
R176
0
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
H
FL101
13 TO(3/7)
27MAVD
R116
22
VOUT
SI0
SI0
9
GND
NOISE
VIN
512FS2CH
4
2
CONT
3
1
B+
+1.8V
4-28
JL122
9
9P
B TO B
GND
8
XFRRST
7
3.3V_MNT
6
XIFCS
5
XIFBUSY
4
SI0
3
SC0
2
GND
1
SO0
1
+1.8V
2
+5V
3
GND
4
+3.3V
5
+11V
6
M_GND
TO IF-89 BOARD
CN404
(PAGE 4-10)
CN102
6P
TO IF-89 BOARD
(CN403)
(MF-128 HARNESS)
(PAGE 4-9)
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
AV-61 (AUDIO OUT, VIDEO OUT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
For printed wiring board
There are a few cases that the part printed on
this diagram isn’t mounted in this model.
•
AV-61 BOARD
CN401
CN402
CN403
CN404
CN405
CN406
D-8
E-7
D-6
B-3
B-3
D-7
IC403
IC404
IC405
IC406
IC407
D-6
B-7
C-8
A-4
B-6
: Uses unleaded solder.
Power block
Q404
Q405
D-7
D-8
S401
S402
S403
S404
S405
S406
S407
S408
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-4
A-2
A-4
A-2
A-8
AV-61 board
(AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)
ER-14 board
(AV AMP)
MS-81 board
(LOADING MOTOR)
FL-126 board
(LED)
IF-89 board
(IF COM)
4-29
MB-103 board
(DVD/CD RF AMP, SERVO,
MOTOR DRIVE, AD DECODER,
SYSTEM CONTROL,
AUDIO ADC, PLL)
4-30
AUDIO OUT, VIDEO OUT
AV-61
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-29 for printed wiring board.
5
AV-61 BOARD(1/2)
7
R201
4700
± 0.5%
-REF.NO.:2000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
R202
4700
± 0.5%
NO MARK:PB MODE
R205
5600
± 0.5%
RGBSEL
R212
5600
± 0.5%
C206
180p
CH
R208
2200
1.3
C203
180p
CH
EUROVY
5
V
B
8
R210
2200
C201
560p
CH
9
C207
0.01u
B
6
10
7
CB/R
AUDIO AMP
LCH_OUT
R237
XX
R239
XX
D_GND_VIDEO
C
(SEE PAGE 4-28)
F
23
D_GND_VIDEO
22
Y/G
21
D_GND_VIDEO
20
Y
19
D_GND_VIDEO
18
C
17
DISC/EXR
16
V
15
EUROVY
14
D_GND_VIDEO
13
RGBSEL
12
ALT-
11
SPDIF
10
ALT+
9
P_GND_SPDIF
8
P_GND_AUDIO
7
RMUTE
6
ART+
5
LMUTE
4
ART-
3
MAMUTE
2
AU+5V
1
R206
5600
± 0.5%
R204
4700
± 0.5%
C202
560p
CH
3
5
6
R285
0
2 TO(2/2)
P_GND
R241
470
R242
470
RCH_OUT2
JL240
R227
470
C215
XX
R230
47k
C208
0.01u
B
R211
5600
± 0.5%
R209
2200
C218
XX
C217
XX
C216
XX
R243
470
AUDIO
JL222
JL221
C209
1u
50V
JL220
JL218
R224
10k
P_GND
JL216
6.0
D202
DAP202K-T-146
JL215
ERAUDIOR
ERAUDIOL
3 TO(2/2)
AU+11V
Q204
DTC124TKA-T146
MUTE DRIVE
JL214
0.6
JL213
JL212
0.6
JL211
R213
4700
D201
DAN202K-T-146
JL210
R225
47k
JL235
JL234
Q210
XX
JL209
JL208
JL207
B+
JL233
JL232
C212
XX
D203
XX
JL205
JL231
R232
XX
C213
220u
16V
R231
XX
R249
220
R214
XX
R253
1k
Q211
2SC2712-YG-TE85L
BUFFER
1.7
2.4
R254
1k
R251
68
C229
47u
16V
10.6
C240
XX
1
COAXIAL
VCC
4.9
JL203
B+
3
IC204
GP1FA550TZ
C227
47u
16V
R281
XX
C221
XX
C222
0.01u
B
C223
0.01u
B
AU+11V
4
D_GND_VIDEO
TO IF-89 BOARD
CN402
3
EVER+3.3V
(SEE PAGE 4-9)
2
A_MUTE
1
VMUTE
Y
Y/CHROMA
PB
C242
330u
6.3V
B+
R217
10k
Q203
2SC2712-YG-TE85L
SWITCH
R219
220k
-10.1
C243
XX
R218
100k
-12.0
BSW_-13V
B-
B+
JL204
GND
C241
XX
3
2
4.9
10.0
-10.8
JL202
1
1.7
2
IN
AU+5V REG
R252
10k
GND
C226
XX
OUT
R287
XX
AI+5V
5
CHROMA
10.7
R216
5600
-10.6
IC203
JL201
6
VIDEO SIGNAL
R233
XX
R256
1k
10.6
J201
SW_-13V
SIGNAL PATH
Q209
XX
Q201
2SB710A-RTX
SWITCH
C228
47u
16V
7
R236
XX
IC203
NJM78L05UA-TE1
H
7P
CN202
JL237
JL236
Q206
XX
OPTICAL
AI+5V
B+
4.9
I
VMUTE
B+
9.2
R228
10k
0
R222
10k
JL217
D IN
R245
XX
R244
XX
Q205
2SB709A-QRS-TX
MUTE DRIVE
10.0
9.9
JL223
G
DIGITAL OUT
JL239
C211
47u
16V
C205
180p
CH
R207
2200
JL224
JL206
1
RY201
XX
R234
4700
0
0
1.3
1.3
-10.1
1
Q202
UN2213-TX
MUTE DRIVE
TO MB-103 BOARD(7/7)
CN601
24
Cb/R
2
B+
E
WIDE
3
B+
D
C204
180p
CH
R203
4700
± 0.5%
7
LCH_OUT2
R240
470
0.8
LCH MUTE
4
25
8
RCH_OUT
Q208
TRANSISTOR2SD1938(F)-ST(TX).SO
Cr/B
10
R235
4700
RCH MUTE
CR/B
25P
12
D206
XX
0.8
Q207
TRANSISTOR2SD1938(F)-ST(TX).SO
WIDE
CN203
JL238
BR238
100k
8
IC201
BA4558F-E2
IC201
14
R284
0
B+
0
Y
13
D_GND_VIDEO
C
Y/G
12
R229
47k
DISCEXT
1 TO(2/2)
11
R226
470
C210
47u
16V
1.3
AUDIO OUT
A
6
B-
4
10.6
3
0
2
1
C224
47u
16V
D205
1SS355TE-17
-10.8
Q216
2SB709A-QRS-TX
SWITCH
--11.4
R221
10k
C244
47u
16V
R220
470
4 TO(2/2)
D_GND_VIDEO
P_GND AUDIO
R283
XX
IC204
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT
J
16
AUDIO OUT
AV-61 (1/2)
4-31
4-32
AUDIO
SIGNAL
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-29 for printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-6 for waveforms.
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
AV-61 BOARD(2/2)
JL117
SW_-13V
D_GND_VIDEO
6
1
-REF.NO.:2000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
JL136
5
2
LCH_OUT
JL137
NO MARK:PB MODE
LCH_OUT2
4
3
JL118
RCH_OUT2
B-
B+
0.5
3
V
4
0.6
5
0.6
6
C
7
3.4
0.5
0.6
CB/R
3.4
0.6
CR/B
-5.0
4.5
Q105
UN2111-TX
WIDE SWITCH
0
VIDEO_OUT
DCCNT1
GND
GND
WIDE
JL101
20
Y_OUT
Y_IN
18
NC
NC
+5V(NC)
Y_IN(NC)
GND
NC
MUTE2
6
Cr_IN
Cr_OUT
-5V
-5V
-5.0
JL104
R142
XX
4.5
0.6
R134
68
0.1
-5.0
JL120
BD105
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
D106
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
IC102
VIDEO BUFFER
R121
10k
C114 C113
0.1u 47u
16V
B
R126
XX
JL105
R143 XX
JL122
R145 XX
JL123
J102
XX
13
D_GND_VIDEO
12
cR/B
11
VMUTE
10
WIDE
9
+5V
8
DISCEXT
7
+11V
6
ERAUDIOR
5
2
RGBSEL
1
JL124
JL107
R149 XX
R146
68
JL109
R151 XX
JL126
R155 XX
JL127
JL110
R148
68
JL111
JL112
R150
68
JL113
JL114
JL131
D102
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
JL132
JL133
D103
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
D104
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
JL128
JL134
JL130
R152
10k
AI+5V
3 TO(1/2)
AU+11V
14P
JL125
B+
Y
D_GND_VIDEO
Cb
D_GND_VIDEO
Cr
D_GND_VIDEO
N.C.
LINE1
LINE2
N.C.
CN103
D1 VIDEO OUT
1
ERAUDIOL
XX
8
4
3
R147
R128
XX
1
14
Cb/R
Q106
XX
2
D_GND_VIDEO
R127
XX
JL106
3
15
JL129
VMUTE
J103
S1 VIDEO OUT
R144
XX
0.1
Q104
UN2213-TX
WIDE SWITCH
JL103
R133
68
7
H
CB_OUT
-5.0
4
16
Y/G
EUROVY
5
Cb_IN
JL119
0.6
17
D_GND_VIDEO
P_GND_AUDIO
GND
LINE OUT
14
G
Y_OUT
VIDEO2
R141
XX
5
(SEE PAGE 4-37)
4
DCCNT2
VIDEO1
J104
6
TO ER-14 BOARD
CN901
-5V
NC(GND)
C112
0.1u
B
0.1
AUDIO2
L
JL116
7
Y
3
NC(DCCNT2)
0.6
JL108
R154
0
8
D_GND_VIDEO
19
R122
XX
JL102
-5V
R130
68
9
C
F
21
B-
V
-5V
NC
MUTE1
0
21P
2
C_IN
D_GND_VIDEO
CN102
C_OUT
4.5
14 13 12 11 10
E
+5V
VIDEO_IN
C111 R124
47u
XX
16V
4.5
NC
AUDIO1
L
G
1.1
1
AUDIO2
R
Y
Y/G
NC
NC
R140
XX
R131
68
C
R123
XX
DISCEXT
1 TO(1/2)
9
RGBSEL
EUROVY
1.1
NC
AUDIO1
R
G
C110
47u
16V
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Y
8
0.5
R286
0
D_GND_VIDEO
2
1
C109
0.047u
B
R129
10k
LA73050-TLM
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
IC102
D
P_GND AUDIO
L101
100uH
B+
B
2 TO(1/2)
RCH_OUT
JL121
RY102
XX
C
NOT USE
D101
XX
VIDEO OUT
A
15
LINE3
SW_GND
N.C.
SW
B+
SIGNAL PATH
ERAUDIOR
ERAUDIOL
C115
VIDEO SIGNAL
IC103
NJM79M05DL1A(TE2)
CHROMA
I
Y
Y/CHROMA
ET101
XX
XX
AUDIO
SIGNAL
SW_-13V
J
B-
R153
33
C101
0.01u
B
IN
OUT
1
2
3
-5.0
-5V REG
-9.8
IC103
GND
PB
C102
47u
16V
4 TO(1/2)
BJL115
D_GND_VIDEO
P_GND AUDIO
16
4-33
4-34
VIDEO OUT
AV-61 (2/2)
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
ER-14 (AV AMP) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
For printed wiring board
•
: Uses unleaded solder.
Power block
There are a few cases that the part printed on
this diagram isn’t mounted in this model.
AV-61 board
(AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)
ER-14 board
(AV AMP)
MS-81 board
(LOADING MOTOR)
FL-126 board
(LED)
IF-89 board
(IF COM)
AV AMP
ER-14
4-35
MB-103 board
(DVD/CD RF AMP, SERVO,
MOTOR DRIVE, AD DECODER,
SYSTEM CONTROL,
AUDIO ADC, PLL)
4-36
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ER-14 BOARD
LINE OUT
IC901
-REF.NO.: SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT
L905
100uH
C
Y/G
7
GND
8
Cb/R
9
GND
10
Cr/B
11
VMUTE
12
WIDE
D
C905
47u
16V
13
+5V
14
DISCEXT
15
+11V
16
ERAUDIOR
17
GND(AU)
18
EUROVY
19
ERAUDIOL
20
RGBSEL
21
JL942
JL943
JL944
B+
JL945
JL946
C912
XX
R902
0
C909
XX
R903
XX
C908
XX
B+
JL947
C901
47u
16V
JL948
C902
47u
16V
JL950
D907
DAP202K-T-146
GND
+5V
NC
DCCNT2
GND
C_IN
NC
R_IN
NC
G_OUT
G_IN
MUTE2
NC
B_OUT
R/C_OUT
MUTE1
GND
NC
0
R919
XX
R936
XX
SW1
0
0
3.3
0.1
0
JL949
R950
22k
DCCNT1
0.5
R901
XX
JL941
LA73052-TLM
0.6
R913
XX
JL939
1
C903
47u
16V
JL938
IC901
1.1
2
JL937
B_IN
NC
SW2
V/Y_OUT
V_IN
MUTE3
NC
NC
Y_IN
NC
NC
-5V
DCCNT3
NC
GND
-5V
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
(SEE PAGE 4-33)
JL936
5
6
C913
0.22u
B
3
GND
B-
R956 XX
4
4
B-
JL935
5
GND
JL934
6
3
7
2
C
8
-5V
9
1
Y
TO AV-61 BOARD(2/2)
CN102
B+
JL933
V
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
B
21P
R905
47k
R906
47k
CN901
VIDEO BUFFER
R940
XX
R941
XX
R942
XX
R943
XX
A
11.7
3.4
-0.6
3.4
R928
68
-0.6
R929
68
-0.1
3.4
R918
68
B-5.1
-5.1
0.5
Q903
UN2111-TX
0
0
Q906
UN2213-TX
R909
330
4.9
R916
2200
D917
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
R917
2200
4.9
Q902
2SD601A-QRS-TX
FB907
0uH
Q906-908
FUNCTION SWITCH
0
Q902,903
BLANKING SWITCH
3.4
3.4
Q907
UN2111-TX
11.7
B+
Q901
UN2213-TX
SWITCH
R927
68
C914
0.22u
B
B+
R907
47k
C907
47u
16V
-0.6
R944
XX
E
F
4.7
FB908
0uH
R914
2200
0.5
CNJ902
R910
330
D901
1SS355TE-17
JL918
R915
1k
JL919
JL920
Q908
UN2211-TX
JL921
JL922
R911
330
D929
UDZ-TE-17-6.2B
D930
UDZ-TE-17-13B
R912
330
G
C962
100p
JL923
JL924
C963 R939
47
100p
FB909
0uH
JL925
D919
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
FB910
0uH
D920
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
JL926
JL927
JL928
H
C943
100p
R957
0uH
JL929
D922
XX
JL930
JL931
R924
470
JL932
C945
100p
16
R958
0uH
21P
JL917
0
0
R908
220k
D918
HZM6.8ZWA1TL
D924
XX
21
GND(E)
20
V_IN
19
V/Y_OUT
18
GND(E)
17
GND(E)
16
BLANKING_OUT
15
R/C_OUT
14
GND(E)
13
GND(E)
12
N.C.
11
G_OUT
10
AVLINKO
9
GND(E)
8
FUNCTION_SW_OUT
7
B_OUT
6
A(L)IN
5
GND(E)
4
GND(A)
3
A(L)OUT
2
A(R)IN
1
A(R)OUT
LINE(RGB)-TV
R926
470
4-37
4-38
AV AMP
ER-14
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
HS11S1, HS11S1F (SWITCHING REGULATOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
POWER BOARD (SW REG)
(HS11S1)
1-468-645-
11
POWER BOARD (SW REG)
(HS11S1F)
Power block
AV-61 board
(AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)
ER-14 board
(AV AMP)
MS-81 board
(LOADING MOTOR)
FL-126 board
(LED)
1-468-647-
SWITCHING REGULATOR
POWER BLOCK (HS11S1, HS11S1F)
4-39
11
IF-89 board
(IF COM)
4-40
MB-103 board
(DVD/CD RF AMP, SERVO,
MOTOR DRIVE, AD DECODER,
SYSTEM CONTROL,
AUDIO ADC, PLL)
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
SWITCHING REGULATOR
T101
TR010032:HS11S1F
TR011019:HS11S1U
POWER TRANSFORMER
1
HS11S1F
Q211
2SJ525
8
L211
10u
D211
D2L20U
D213
D1NS4/6
Z150
ST02D-170
R212
47k
C213
47u
35V
C211
150u
35V
D313
1SS270A
R211
1.5k
2
L221
100uH
D221
D1NL20U
L150
(SHORT)
C221
100u35V
D312
D1N60
C110
150u
400V
9
C151
100p:HS11S1F
150p:HS11S1U
2kV
D
S
L110
45
R110
10
C
D110
D1NL20U
D103
0.8W
33V
C117
1u
50V
C112
47u
35V
L311
39uH
D311
D1NS4
10
D611
D1NS4
5
R113
100
C314
22u
50V
P311
1A/125V
3
IC101
M1P2E4
SW201
EVQPC005K
R613
220
R313
270
C223
47u
35V
Q311
2SD1768S
L611
10uH
IC411
XC6201P352TH
P611
2.0A/125V
PC101A
TLP421F
R621
390
Q611
2SC2655
I G O
C311
150u
35V
C111
10u
50V
R213
680
Q621
DTC143ESA
C613
47u
35V
C611
330u
35V
R311
1k
C313
47u
35V
C413
47u
35V
D621
SLR-343VC
6
R622
120
D622
SLR-343MC
CN201 13P
1
POWER
2
P-CONT
3
EVER-13V
4
MGND
5
MGND
6
SW+11V
7
SW+11V
8
SW+3.3V
9
GND
10
GND
11
EVER+3.3V
12
SW+5V
13
EVER+11V
TO IF-89 BOARD
CN401
(SEE PAGE 4-9)
R711
1.8k
Q712
DTC143ESA
C711
47u
35V
12
11
D212
0.8W
33V
C513
47u
35V
C511
100u
35V
HS11S1F
CN101 2P
F101
2A/250V
1
P511
1.5A/125V
13
C101
0.22u
250V
R101
1M
C102
(OPEN)
R301
68
R102
1M
D104
S1WBA60
2
C103
100p
250V
FG101
TP00370-41
R303
2.2k
PC101B
TLP421F
L102
18mH
L101
18mH
C301
1u
50V
C104
100p
250V
C107
680p:HS11S1F
1000p:HS11S1U
250V
C302
10u
50V
L511
100uH
D511
D1NL20U:HS11S1F
D2L20U:HS11S1U
IC301
AN1431T
R304
1.2k
R305
300(270-360)
R306
1.6k
FG201
TPOO370-41
Note :
The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number
specified.
4-41
Note :
Les composants identifiés par
une marque 0 sont critiques
pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une
pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
4-42
SWITCHING REGULATOR
POWER BLOCK (HS11S1, HS11S1F)
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
MEMO
4-44E
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
SECTION 5
IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
5-1. SYSTEM CONTROL PIN FUNCTION
(MB-103 BOARD IC104: MB91307RPFV-G-BND-E1)
Pin No.
1-5
6
Pin Name
I/O
Function
HA17-HA21
HA22
O
–
Address bus A17 to A21
Not used
7
8
WP
XSACS
O
–
I2C EEPROM write protect
Not used
9
10
AVCC
AVRH
–
–
Power supply (+3.3 V)
Reference power supply (+3.3 V)
11
12
AVSS
AN0
–
I
GND
Set of mode 0
13
14
AN1
AN2
I
I
Set of mode 1
Set of mode 2
15
16
AN3
INT0
I
I
Set of mode 3 (fixed at “H”)
Interrupt input from AV DEC
17
18
INT1
INT2
I
I
Interrupt input from ARP
Interrupt input from SDSP
19
20
INT3
INT4
–
I
Not used
IF CON interrupt input
21
22
INT5
INT6
–
–
Not used
Not used
23
24
INT7
VCC
–
–
Not used
Power supply (+3.3 V)
25
26
SI0
SO0
I
O
Serial bus 0 (data input)
Serial bus 0 (data output)
27
28
SC0
SI1
O
–
Serial bus 0 (clock output)
Not used
29
30
SO1
SC1
O
O
Serial bus 1 (data output)
Serial clock output
31
32
SI2
SO2
I
O
Serial bus 2 (data input)
Serial bus 2 (data output)
33
34
DSENS
VSS
–
–
Not used
GND
35
36
XRST
XARPRST
O
O
System reset signal output
WIDE select signal output
37
38
RGBSEL
SDA
–
I/O
Not used
I2C data signal
39
40
SCL
TRM
O
–
I2C clock output
Not used
41
42
EUROV/Y
EXT/DSEL
–
–
Not used
Not used
43
44
MD0
MD1
I
I
Input of mode select 0 (fixed at “H”)
Input of mode select 1 (fixed at “L”)
45
46
MD2
DREQ0
I
I
Input of mode select 2 (fixed at “L”)
Input of DMA-REQ 0 from AV DEC
47
48
DACK0
XDRVMUTE
O
O
Output of DMA-ACK 0 to AV DEC
Drive mute signal output
49
50
DREQ1
DACK1
I
O
Input of DMA-REQ 1 from AV DEC
Output of DMA-ACK 1 to AV DEC
51
52
XIFCS
VSS
O
–
Chip select signal to IF CON
GND
53
54
X1
X0
O
I
Clock output (16.5 MHz)
Clock input (16.5 MHz)
5-1
Pin No.
Pin Name
I/O
Function
55
VCC
–
Power supply (+3.3 V)
56
57
CKSW1
OCSW1
I
I
Chuck sensor input
Tray sensor input
58
59
CS0X
CS1X
O
–
Chip select signal output (for external ROM)
Not used
60
61
CS2X
CS3X
O
O
Chip select signal output (for AV DEC)
Chip select signal output (for AV DEC)
62
63
CS4X
CS5X
O
O
Chip select signal output (for ARP)
Chip select signal output (for SERVO DSP)
64
65
VCCI
CS6X
–
–
Power supply (+1.8 V)
Not used
66
67
CX7X
XWAIT
–
I
Not used
Wait signal input
68
69
BGRNTX
BRQ
I
I
Test terminal (fixed at “H”)
Test terminal (fixed at “L”)
70
71
XRD
XWRH
O
O
Read timing signal output
High order byte write timing signal output
72
73
XWRL
NMIX
–
I
Not used
Fixed at “H”
74
75
VCCI
VSS
–
–
Power supply (+1.8 V)
GND
76
77
XFRRST
CPUCK
I
O
Reset signal input from IF CON
CPU clock signal output
78
79
OCSW2
XDACS
–
O
Not used
Chip select signal output to DAC (2 CH)
80
81
TRMÅ|
48/44.1K
–
O
Not used
PLL FS control signal output
82
83
WIDE
MAMUTE
O
O
LD mute signal output
Audio mute signal output
84
85Å[92
SRAMWE
HD0-HD7
–
I/O
Not used
Data bus D0 to D7 (16 bits only)
93-100
101
HD8-HD15
VSS
I/O
–
Data bus D8 to D15 (16 bits) and D0 - D7 (8 bits)
GND
102-109
110
HA0-HA7
VCC
O
–
Address bus A00 to A07
Power supply (+3.3 V)
110-118
119
HA8-HA15
VSS
O
–
Address bus A08 to A15
GND
HA16
O
Address bus A16
120
5-2E
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
SECTION 6
TEST MODE
6-1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6-3. SYSCON DIAGNOSIS
The Test Mode allows you to make diagnosis and adjustment easily using the remote commander and monitor TV. The instructions,
diagnostic results, etc. are given on the on-screen display (OSD).
The same contents as board detail check by serial interface can be
checked from the remote commander. On the Test Mode Menu
screen, press [0] key on the remote commander, and the following
check menu will be displayed.
6-2. STARTING TEST MODE
Press the [TITLE], [CLEAR], [POWER] keys on the remote commander in this order with the power of main unit in OFF status,
and the Test Mode starts, then “DIAG START” will be displayed
on the fluorescent display tube and the menu shown below will be
displayed on the TV screen. At the bottom of menu screen, the
model name and revision number are displayed. Last Off at the
lower right of screen indicates the information code concerning
the last power off. To execute each function, select the desired
menu and press its number on the remote commander. To exit from
the Test Mode, press the [POWER] key.
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
_
### Syscon Diagnosis ###
Check Menu
Quit
All
Version
Peripheral
Servo
Supply
AV Decoder
Video
Audio
Test Mode Menu
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Syscon Diagnosis
Drive Auto Adjustment
Drive Manual Operation
Mecha Aging
Emargency Hisory
Version Information
Video Level Adjustment
Exit: Power Key
0. (Quit)
Quit the Syscon Diagnosis and return to the Test Mode Menu.
1. (All items continuous check)
This menu checks all diagnostic items continuously. Normally, all
items are checked successively one after another automatically
unless an error is found, but at a certain item that requires judgment through a visual check to the result, the following screen is
displayed for the key entry.
_
Model
: DPX-6xxxx
Revision : x.xxx
Last Off: xx
### Syscon Diagnosis ###
Power Off Information Code List
Diag All Check
No. 2 Version
00: Primary Power Off
01: Power Off Request from SYSTEM CONTROL
02: Power Off by Emergency Power Off Command from
SYSTEM CONTROL
(if information is sent from SYSTEM CONTROL)
03: IF CON Judged that SYSTEM CONTROL is Faulty
04: Power Off from Diagnosis Mode of IF CON
05: Forced Power Off by the User
06: Power Off by Power Supply Voltage Monitor
2-3. ROM Check Sum
Check Sum = 2005
Press NEXT Key to Continue
Press PREV key to Repeat
_
For the ROM Check, the check sum calculated by the Syscon is
output, and therefore you must compare it with the specified value
for confirmation.
Following the message, press > key to go to the next item, or
. key to repeat the same check again.
6-1
General Description of Checking Method
To quit the diagnosis and return to the Check Menu screen, press
x or [ENTER] key. If an error occurred, the diagnosis is suspended
and the error code is displayed as shown below.
2. Version
(2-2) Revision
ROM revision number is displayed.
Error: Not detected.
The revision number defined in the source file is displayed
with four digits.
### Syscon Diagnosis ###
3-2. EEPROM Check
Error 03: EEPROM Write/Read N
Address
: 00000001
Write Data
: 2492
Read
Data : 2490
Press NEXT Key to Continue
Press PREV key to Repeat
_
(2-3) ROM Check Sum
Check sum is calculated.
Error: Not detected.
8-bit data are added up to the ROM address 0x000F0000 to
0x002EFFFF, and the result is displayed with 4-digit hexadecimal number. Error is not detected. Compare the result
with the specified value.
(2-4) Model Type
Model code is displayed.
Error: Not detected.
The model code read from the EEPROM is displayed with
2-digit hexadecimal number.
Press x key to quit the diagnosis, or . key to repeat the
same item where an error occurred, or > key to continue the
check from the item next to faulty item.
Selecting [2] and subsequent items call the submenu screen of each
item. When “———” is displayed in the submenu, it means that
the test is not supported in the model.
(2-5) Region
Region code is displayed.
Error: Not detected.
The region code determined from the model code is displayed.
For example, if “5. Supply” is selected, the following submenu
will be displayed.
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
_
(2-6) M’t Check
Mount resistance is checked.
Error 22: The region code does not accord.
Check whether the region code that is deduced from model
resistance and destination resistance accords with the region code that is deduced from region resistance value.
### Syscon Diagnosis ###
Check Menu
No. 5 Supply
Quit
All
ARP Register Check
ARP to RAM Data Bus
ARP to RAM Address Bus
ARP RAM Check
3. Peripheral
(3-2) EEPROM Check
Data write t read, and accord check
Error 03: EEPROM write/read discord
0x9249, 0x2942 and 0x4294 are written to the address 0x00
to 0xFF of the EEPROM and then read for checking. Before writing, the data are saved, then after checking, they
are written to restore the contents of EEPROM.
0. (Quit)
Quit the submenu and return to the main menu.
1. (All submenu items continuous check.)
This menu checks 2 and subsequent items successively. At the item
where visual check is required for judgment or an error occurred,
the checking is suspended and the message is output for key entry.
Normally, all items are checked successively one after another
automatically unless an error is found.
Selecting [2] and subsequent items executes respective menus and
outputs the results.
For the contents of each submenu, see “General Description of
Checking Method” and “Check Items List”.
(3-3) Gate Array Check (Machine only in which Gate Array is
installed)
Data write t read, and accord check
Error 02: Gate array write/read discord
Data of 0x00 to 0xFF is written sequentially to the address
0xF and then read for checking.
(3-4) HAND FLASH Check (HAND Flash installed model only)
Data clear t write t read, and accord check
Error 04: Clear error
05: Write error
06: Read data discord
21: Number of defective block exceeds 10.
Clear 0th block of flash memory and write. Then read for
checking.
When defective block exists, the address is displayed.
When the number of defective block exceeds 10, it is error.
(3-5) SACD Check (SACD Decoder installed model only)
Device reset t Built-in RAM check
Error 50: Write/read data discord
6-2
(3-6) Venc Check (Progressive support model only)
Data write t read, and accord check
Error: 52: Write/read data discord
Error may occur due to defect of access with syscon.
(5-4) ARP to RAM Address Bus
Data write t other address read discord check
Error 10: ARP Tt RAM address bus error
Caution: Address and data display in case of an error is
different from the display of other diagnosis (described
later).
Before starting the test, all addresses of RAM (IC303) are
cleared to 0x0000.
First, 0xA55A is written to the address 0x00000, and the
address data are read and checked from addresses 0x00001
to 0x80000 while shifting 1 bit each. Next, the data at that
address is cleared, and it is written to the address 0x00001,
and read and checked in the same manner. This check is
repeated up to the address 0x80000 while shifting the address data by 1 bit each.
If data other than 0 is read at the addresses except written
address, an error is given because all addresses were already cleared to 0. In this check, the error display pattern is
different from that of other diagnosis; read data, written
address, and read address are displayed in this order. However, the message uses same template, and accordingly exchange Address and Data when reading. The following display, for example,
(3-7) ————— (Not supported)
(3-8) External RAM Check (External RAM installed model only)
Test data write t read, and accord check
Error
Check the external RAM used in syscon.
4. Servo
(4-2) Servo DSP Check
Data write t read, and accord check
Error 12: Read data discord
0x9249, 0x2942 and 0x4294 are written to the RAM address 0x602 of the Servo DSP and then read for checking.
(4-3) —————
Check no support.
(4-4) RF Amp Register Check
Data write t read, and accord check
Error xx: RF Amp register write, and read data discord
Implement 8-bit shift operation of the xx to the readable/
writable register of the RF Amp. If once write data do not
accord with read data, it is NG.
### Syscon Diagnosis ###
5-4. ARP to RAM Address Bus
Error 10: ARP - RAM Address B
Address
: 0000A55A
Write Data
: 00000000
Read Data
: 00080000
Press NEXT Key to Continue
Press PREV key to Repeat
_
5. Data Supply System
(5-2) ARP Register Check
Data write t read, and accord check
Error 08: ARP register write, and read data discord
Data 0x00 to 0xFF is written sequentially to the ARP TMAX
register (address 0xC6) and then read for checking.
(5-3) ARP to RAM Data Bus
Data write t read, and accord check
Error 09: ARP Tt RAM data bus error
Data 0x0001 to 0x8000 where one bit each is set to 1 are
written to the address 0 of RAM (IC303) connected to the
ARP (IC302) through the bus, then they are read and
checked. In case of discord, written bit pattern and read
data are displayed. If data where multiple bits are 1 are
read, the bits concerned may touch each other. Further, if
data where certain bit is always 1 or 0 regardless of written
data, the line could be disconnected or shorted.
shows the data 0xA55A was read from address 0x00080000 though
it was written to the address 0x00000000. This implies that these
addresses are in the form of shadow. Also, if the read data is not
0xA55A, another error will be present.
(5-5) ARP RAM Check
Data write t read, and accord check
Error 11: ARP RAM read data discord
The program code data stored in ROM are copied to all
areas of RAM (IC303) connected to the ARP through the
bus, then they are read and checked if they accord. If the
detail check was selected initially, the data are written to
all areas and read, then the same test is conducted once
again with the data where all bits are inverted between 1
and 0. If discord is detected, faulty address, written data,
and read data are displayed following the error code 11,
and the test is suspended.
6-3
8. Audio Output
(8-2) ARP t1935
Data flow from supply system DRAM to SDRAM of AV
Decoder is tested.
Error 14: ARP t 1935 video NG
15: ARP t 1935 audio NG
6. AV Decoder
(6-2) 1935 RAM
Data write t read, and accord check
Error 13: AVD RAM read data discord
The program code data stored in ROM (IC107) are copied
to all areas of RAM (IC504, IC505) connected to the AVD
through the bus, then they are read and checked if they accord. Further, the same test is conducted once again with
the data where all bits are inverted between 1 and 0. If discord is detected, faulty address, written data, and read data
are displayed following the error code 13, and the test is
suspended.
During the test, OSD display becomes blank as the OSD
area is also checked.
(8-3) Test Tone
Pink noise output
Error: Not detected.
In the models without DD output, the test tone is output
from L and R of 2-channel only, and in the models with
DD output, the test tone is output from L and R of 2-channel, and all channels of 5.1 output.
After turning on all outputs, each time the [NEXT] key is
pressed, the output channel is switched for individual channel checking.
(6-3) 1935 SP
ROM t AVD RAM t Video OUT
Error: Not detected.
The data including sub picture streams in ROM are transferred to the RAM in AVD, and output as video signals
from the AVD.
Though OSD display becomes blank, the output of video
signals continues until the key is pressed.
Diagnosis Check Items List
2. Version Display
(2-2) Revision
(2-3) ROM Check Sum
(2-4) Model Type
(2-5) Region
(2-6) M’t Check
7. Video Output
(7-2) Color Bar
AVD color bar command write t Video OUT
Error: Not detected.
The command is transferred to the AVD, and the color bar
signals are output from video terminals.
3. Peripheral
(3-2) EEPROM Check
(3-3) Gate Array Check
(3-4) NAND FLASH Check (NAND Flash installed model only)
(3-5) SACD Check (SACD decoder installed model only)
(3-6) Venc Check (Video encoder installed model only)
(3-7) ———— (Function not supported)
(3-8) External RAM Check (External RAM installed model only)
(7-3) Composite Out (European model only)
EURO-AV video output check
AVD color bar command write t Video (EURO-AV) OUT
Error: Not detected.
With the component of video output turned off, the color
bar signals are output from the EURO-AV terminal.
This check is performed for European model only.
4. Servo
(4-2) Servo DSP Check
(4-3) ———— (Function not supported)
(4-4) RF Amp Register Check
(7-4) Y/C Out (European model only)
Y/C video output check
AVD color bar command write t Video (Y/C) OUT
Error: Not detected.
With the Y/C of video output turned on, the color bar signals are output.
This check is performed for European model only.
5. Data Supply System
(5-2) ARP Register Check
(5-3) ARP to RAM Data Bus
(5-4) ARP to RAM Address Bus
(5-5) ARP RAM Check
6. AV Decoder
(6-2) 1935 RAM
(6-3) 1935 SP
(7-5) RGB Out (European model only)
RGB video output check
AVD color bar command write t Video (RGB) OUT
Error: Not detected.
With the RGB of video output turned on, the color bar signals are output.
This check is performed for European model only.
7. Video Output
(7-2) Color Bar
(7-3) Composite Out (European model only)
(7-4) Y/C Out (European model only)
(7-5) RGB Out (European model only)
(7-6) Component Out (European model only)
(7-7) Euro AV Through (European model only)
(7-6) Component Out (European model only)
Component video output check
AVD color bar command write t Video (Component) OUT
Error: Not detected.
With the component of video output turned on, the color
bar signals are output.
This check is performed for European model only.
8. Audio Output
(8-2) ARP t1935
(8-3) Test Tone
(7-7) Euro AV Through (European model only)
AV Through output On/Off
Error: Not detected.
AV Through output is turned on.
This check is performed for European model only.
6-4
Error Codes List
00: Error not detected
01: RAM write/read data discord
02: Gate array NG
03: EEPROM NG
04: Flash memory clear error
05: Flash memory write error
06: Flash memory read data discord
07: 2725 read data discord
08: ARP register read data discord
09: ARP Tt RAM data bus error
10: ARP Tt RAM address bus error
11: ARP RAM read data discord
12: Servo DSP NG
13: RF Amp NG
14: 1935 SDRAM NG
15: ARP t1935 video NG
16: ARP t1935 audio NG
19: 1910 UCODE download NG
1A: System call error (Function not supported)
1B: System call error (Parameter error)
1C: System call error (Illegal ID number)
20: System call error (Time out)
21: NAND Flash faulty blocks exceed 10
22: Resistor installation error
50: SACD Decoder W/R NG
52: Video Encoder W/R NG
55: External RAM W/R NG
90: Error occurred
91: User verification NG
92: Diagnosis cancelled
6-4. DRIVE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
On the Test Mode Menu screen, press [1] key on the remote commander, and the drive auto adjustment menu will be displayed.
## Drive Auto Adjustment ##
Adjustment Menu
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
ALL
DVD-SL
CD
DVD-DL
LCD
Exit: RETURN
Normally, [0] is selected to adjust DVD (single layer), CD, and
DVD (dual layer) in this order. But, individual items can be adjusted for the case where adjustment is suspended due to an error.
In this mode, the adjustment can be made easily through the operation following the message displayed on the screen. Which disc
is currently adjusted is displayed on the fluorescent display tube.
0. ALL
You will be asked if EEPROM data are initialized or not, and for
this prompt, select [0] and press the [ENTER] key. First, the servo
setting data in EEPROM, Emergency History and Hour Meter are
cleared to initialize. Then, [1] DVD-SL disc, [2] CD disc, and [3]
DVD-DL disc are adjusted in this order. Each time one disc was
adjusted, it is ejected, and therefore exchange the disc following
the message. You can exit the adjustment by pressing the x button. In adjusting each disc, the mirror time is measured to check
the disk type. In the auto adjustment, whether the disc type is correct is not checked unlike conventional models, and accordingly,
take care not to insert a different type of disc.
6-5
1. DVD Single Layer Disc
3. DVD Dual Layer Disc
Select [1], insert DVD single layer disc, and press [ENTER] key,
and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then
adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM. The table No. 1 is
used in the changer type model. If there is no disc on the table No.
1, the tray will be open to wait for closing. If there is a disc on the
table, the adjustment starts immediately. If you put a disc prior to
adjustment, confirm that the SL disc is set on the table 1.
Select [3], insert DVD dual layer disc, and press [ENTER] key, and
the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM. The table No. 3 is
used in the changer type model. If there is no disc on the table No.
3, the tray will be open to wait for closing. If there is a disc on the
table, the adjustment starts immediately. If you put a disc prior to
adjustment, confirm that the DL disc is set on the table 3.
DVD Single Layer Disc Adjustment Steps
1. SLED Reset
2. Disc Check Memory SL
3. Set Disc Type SL
4. Spdl Start
5. Ld ON
6. Focus Error Check
7. Focus ON 0 with PI Level measure
8. Auto Track Offset Adjust L0
9. Trv Level Check
10. Tracking ON
11. CLVA ON
12. Sled ON
13. Auto Focus Balance Adjust
14. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust
15. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0
16. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0
17. EQ Boost Adjust
18. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust
19. Auto Tracking Gain Adjust
20. RF Level Measure
21. Jitter measure
22. Eep Copy Loop Filter Offset
23. All Servo Stop
DVD Dual Layer Disc Adjustment Steps
1. Sled Reset
2. Disc Check Memory DL
3. Set Disc Type DL
DVD DL Layer 1 Adjust
4. Spdl Start
5. LD ON
6. Fcs ON 1 with PI Level measure
7. Auto Track Offset Adjust L1
8. Tracking ON
9. Clva ON
10. Sled ON
11. Auto Focus Balance Adjust
12. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L1
13. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L1
14. Eq Boost Adjust L1
15. Auto Track Gain Adjust L1
16. Jitter measure
DVD DL Layer 0 Adjust
17. Focus Jump (L1 t L0)
18. Auto Track Offset Adjust L0
19. Tracking ON
20. Clva ON
21. Sled ON
22. Auto Focus Balance Adjust
23. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0
24. Auto Focus Balance Adjust
25. Eq Boost Adjust L0
26. Auto Track Gain Adjust L0
27. Jitter measure
28. All Servo Stop
2. CD Disc
Select [2], insert CD disc, and press [ENTER] key, and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM. The table No. 2 is used in the
changer type model. If there is no disc on the table No. 2, the tray
will be open to wait for closing. If there is a disc on the table, the
adjustment starts immediately. If you put a disc prior to adjustment, confirm that the CD is set on the table 2.
4. LCD
LCD disc is not adjusted because the adjusted data of CD are reflected, and SACD (hybrid disc) is not adjusted because the adjusted data of CD and DVD-DL are reflected.
CD Adjustment Steps
1. Sled Reset
2. Disc Check Memory CD
3. Set Disc Type CD
4. Spdl Start
5. LD ON
6. Focus Error Check
7. Fcs ON 1 with PI Level measure
8. Auto Track Offset Adjust L0
9. Trv Level Check
10. Tracking ON
11. CLVA ON
12. Sled ON
13. Auto Focus Balance Adjust
14. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust
15. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0
16. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0
17. Eq Boost Adjust
18. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust
19. Auto Track Gain Adjust
20. Copy Adjustment Data to LCD
21. RF Level Measure
22. Jitter measure
23. All Servo Stop
6-6
0. Disc Check Memory
6-5. DRIVE MANUAL OPERATION
On the Test Mode Menu screen, select [2], and the manual operation menu will be displayed. For the manual operation, each servo
on/off control and adjustment can be executed manually.
Disc Check
1. SL Disc Check
2. CD Disc Check
3. DL Disc Check
## Drive Manual Operation ##
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Operation Menu
Disc Type
Servo Control
Track/Layer Jump
Manual Adjustment
Auto Adjustment
Memory Check
0. Reset SLED TILT
On this screen, the mirror time is measured and written to the
EEPROM to check the disc type. First, set a DVD SL disc and
press [1], then set a CD disc and press [2], and finally set a DVD
DL disc and press [3]. The measured mirror time is displayed respectively.
The adjustment must be executed more than once after default
data were written.
From this screen, you can go to another mode by pressing >
or . key, but you cannot enter this mode from another mode.
You can enter this mode from the Operation Menu screen only.
0. Disc Check Memory
Exit: RETURN
In using the Manual Operation menu, take care of the following
points. These commands do not provide protection, thus requiring
correct operation. The sector address or time code field is displayed when a disc is loaded.
1. Set correctly the disc type to be used on the Disc Type
setting screen.
The Disc Type setting must be performed after a disc
was loaded.
The set Disc Type is cleared when the tray is opened.
2. After power ON, if the Manual Operation was selected,
first perform “Reset SLED TILT” by opening 1. Disc Type
screen.
3. In case of an alarm, immediately press the x button to
stop the servo operation, and turn the power OFF.
1. Disc Type
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
0.
Basic operation (controllable from front panel or remote commander)
[POWER] : Power OFF
x : Servo stop
A (Open/Close) : Stop+Eject/Loading
O : Return to Operation Menu or Test Mode Menu
> , . : Transition between sub modes of menu
[1] to [9], [0] : Selection of menu and items
Cursor [Q]/[q] : Increase/Decrease in manually adjusted value
Disc Type
Disc Type Auto Check
DVD SL
12cm
DVD DL
12cm
CD
12cm
SACD
12cm
DVD SL
8cm
DVD DL
8cm
CD
8cm
LCD
8cm
Reset SLED TILT
EMG. 00
On this screen, select the disc type. To select the disc type, press
the number of the loaded disc. The selected disc type is displayed
at the bottom. Selecting [1] automatically selects and displays the
disc type. In case of wrong display, retry “Disc Check Memory”.
Also, opening the tray causes the set disc type to be cleared. In
this case, set the disc type again after loading.
In performing manual operation, the disc type must be set.
6-7
2. Servo Control
Once the disc type has been selected, the sector address or time
code display field will appear as shown below. These values are
displayed when PLL is locked.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Disc Type
Disc Type Auto Check
DVD SL
12cm
DVD DL
12cm
CD
12cm
SACD
12cm
DVD SL
8cm
DVD DL
8cm
CD
8cm
LCD
8cm
Reset SLED TILT
SA. SI. EMG.00
DVD SL 12cm
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
0.
Servo Control
LD
Off
R. Sled FWD
SP
Off
L. Sled REV
Focus
Off
TRK.
Off
Sled
Off
CLVA
Off
FCS. Srch Off
0. Reset SLED TILT
SA. SI. EMG.00
DVD SL 12cm
On this screen, the servo on/off control necessary for replay is
executed. Normally, turn on each servo from 1 sequentially and
when CLVA is turned on, the usual trace mode becomes active. In
the trace mode, DVD sector address or CD time code is displayed.
This is not displayed where the spindle is not locked.
The spindle could run overriding the control if the spindle system
is faulty or RF is not present. In such a case, do not operate CLVA.
Display when DVD SL 12cm disc was selected
Disc Type
Disc Type Auto Check
DVD SL
12cm
DVD DL
12cm
CD
12cm
SACD
12cm
DVD SL
8cm
DVD DL
8cm
CD
8cm
LCD
8cm
Reset SLED TILT
TC. :: EMG.00
CD
12cm
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
0.
[0] Reset SLED TILT: Reset the Sled and Tilt to initial position.
(Reset the Sled only to initial position because the Tilt mechanism is not available
in this model.)
[1] LD:
Turn ON/OFF the laser.
[2] SP:
Turn ON/OFF the spindle.
[3] Focus:
Search the focus and turn on the focus.
[4] TRK.:
Turn ON/OFF the tracking servo.
[5] Sled:
Turn ON/OFF the sled servo. When PLL
is not locked (cannot be locked), the sled
servo is not turned ON. The display keeps
ON.)
[6] CLVA:
Turn ON/OFF normal servo of spindle
servo.
[7] FCS. Srch:
Apply same voltage as that of focus search
to the focus drive to check the focus drive
system.
Move the sled outward. Perform this op5 Sled FWD:
eration with the tracking servo turned off.
Move the sled inward. Perform this opera% Sled REV:
tion with the tracking servo turned off.
Display when CD 12cm disc was selected
[0] Reset SLED TILT: Reset the Sled and Tilt to initial position.
(Reset the Sled only to initial position because the Tilt mechanism is not available
in this model.)
[1] Disc Type Check: Judge automatically the loaded disc. As the
judged result is displayed at the bottom of
screen, make sure that it is correct.
If Disc Check Memory menu has not been
executed after EEPROM default setting,
the disc type cannot be judged. In this case,
return to the initial menu and make a check
for three types of discs (SL, DL, CD).
[2] to [9]:
Select the loaded disc. The adjusted value
is written to the address of selected disc.
No further entry is necessary if [1] was selected.
6-8
4. Manual Adjustment
3. Track/Layer Jump
Track/Layer Jump
1Tj FWD
R. Fj (L1->L0)
1Tj REV
L. Fj (L0->L1)
2Tj FWD
U. Lj (L1->L0)
2Tj REV
D. Lj (L0->L1)
NTj FWD
NTj REV
500Tj FWD
500Tj REV
10k/20k FWD
10k/20k REV
SA. SI. EMG.00
DVD DL 12cm
Manual Adjustment:Up/Down
1. TRK. Offset
2. Focus Gain
3. TRK. Gain
4. Focus Offset
5. Focus Balance
6. L.F. Offset
7. Analog FRSW
8. PLL Dac Gain
9. EQ BOOST
0. GD ADJ
Adjustment: Up/Down
SA. ------ SI. -- EMG. 00
DVD SL 12cm
Jitter FF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
0.
On this screen, track jump, etc. can be performed. Only for the
DVD-DL, the focus jump and layer jump are displayed in the right
field.
[1] 1Tj FWD:
1-track jump forward.
[2] 1Tj REV:
1-track jump reverse.
[3] 2Tj FWD:
2-track jump forward.
[4] 2Tj REV:
2-track jump reverse.
[5] NTj FWD:
N-track jump forward.
[6] NTj REV:
N-track jump reverse.
[7] 500Tj FWD: Fine search forward.
[8] 500Tj REV:
Fine search reverse.
[9] 10k/20k FWD: Direct search forward.
[0] 10k/20k REV: Direct search reverse.
On this screen, each item can be adjusted manually. Select the
desired number [1] to [0] from the remote commander, and current setting for the selected item will be displayed, then increase
or decrease numeric value with $ key or 4 key. This value is
stored in the EEPROM. If CLV has been applied, the jitter is displayed for reference for the adjustment.
[1] TRK. Offset: Adjusts tracking offset.
[2] Focus Gain:
Adjusts focus gain.
[3] TRK. Gain:
Adjusts track gain.
[4] Focus Offset: Adjusts focus offset.
[5] Focus Balance: Adjusts focus balance.
[6] L.F. Offset:
Adjusts loop filter offset.
[7] Analog FRSW: Sets select switch of analog feedback circuit.
[8] PLL Dac Gain: Adjusts D/A converter gain of PLL.
[9] EQ BOOST: Adjusts boost amount of equalizer.
[0] GD ADJ:
Adjusts group delay amount.
– The following commands are valid for DVD-DL disc only –
5 (L1 t L0): Focus jump (Trk/Sled Servo OFF) forward.
% (L0 t L1): Focus jump (Trk/Sled Servo OFF) reverse.
$ (L1 t L0): Layer jump (Trk/Sled Servo ON) forward.
4 (L0 t L1): Layer jump (Trk/Sled Servo ON) reverse.
6-9
6. Memory Check
5. Auto Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
The display image is shown below and three screens in total can
be selected.
Auto Adjustment
TRK. Offset
Focus Balance
Focus Offset
Focus Gain
TRK. Gain
EQ.
L.F. Offset
Group Delay
EEPROM DATA 1
CD
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
LCD
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Focus Gain
TRK. Gain
FCS Balnce
Focus Bias
TRV Offset
L.F. Offset
EQ. Boost
_
UP
: Last Data
DOWN : Next Data
CLEAR : Default Set
SA.04EF905 SI.00 EMG.00
DVD SL 12cm
On this screen, each item can be adjusted automatically. Select the
desired number [1] to [8] from the remote commander, and selected item is adjusted automatically.
EEPROM DATA 2
CD
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
LCD
-----xx
--
RF Jitter
RF Level
FE Level
FE Balance
TRV.Level
TE Gain
PI Level
_
UP
: PREV Data
DOWN : Next Data
CLEAR : Default Set
[1] Auto TRK. Offset: Adjusts tracking offset.
[2] Auto Focus Balance: Adjusts focus balance.
[3] Auto Focus Offset: Adjusts focus offset.
[4] Auto Focus Gain:
Adjusts focus gain.
[5] Auto TRK. Gain:
Adjusts track gain.
[6] Auto EQ
[7] Auto L.F. Offset:
Adjusts loop filter offset.
[8] Auto Group Delay
EEPROM DATA 3
CD
Analog FRSW xx
PLL Dac Gain xx
Mirror Time xx
LCD
xx
xx
xx
_ THR A&L
xx xx
UP
: PREV Data
DOWN : First Data
CLEAR : Default Set
 DL 
SL L0
xx xx
xx xx
xx xx
xx xx
xx xx
xx xx
xx xx
L1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
page.1/3
 DL
SL
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
-xx

L0
xx
-----xx
L1
xx
-------
page.2/3
 DL 
SL
L0
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
L1
xx
xx
xx
xx/xx xx xx
page.3/3
On this screen, current servo adjusted data stored in the EEPROM
are displayed. The adjusted data are initialized by pressing the
[CLEAR] key, but be careful that they are not recoverable after
initialization.
Before clearing the adjusted data, make a note of the set data. This
screen will also appear if [0] All is selected in the Drive Auto
Adjustment. In this case, default setting cannot be made.
“THR A&L” data on the second page cannot be changed if default
setting is once made.
6-10
6-6. MECHA AGING
6-8. VERSION INFORMATION
### Version Infomation ###
### Mecha Aging ###
IF con.
Ver.x.xxx(xxxx)
Group
xx
Press OPEN key
SYScon.
Ver.x.xxx(xxxx)
Model
xx
Region 0x
Abort : STOP key
Servo DSP Ver:x.xxx
AVD ucode Ver:xxxxxxxx
OPT TYPE : x LASER
Exit : RETURN
On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [3] executes the aging
of mechanism. First, open the tray and load a disc. Press the H
key, and the aging will start. When the tray is closed, the disc type
and size are judged and displayed. During aging, the number of
the repeat cycle is displayed. Aging can be aborted at any time by
pressing the x key. After the operation has stopped, unload the
disc and press again the x key or the O key to return to the Test
Mode Menu.
The ROM version, region code, OPT type, etc. are displayed if [5]
is selected in the Test Mode Menu. The parenthesized hexadecimal number in the version number field indicates the checksum
value of the ROM.
* Note after Downloading
After downloading ROM data, sometimes it happens that checksum
is not the same as that of ROM data that has been downloaded.
In such a case, go back to the menu screen and select “0. Syscon
Diagnosis”, then select “1. All” in “2. Version”. If the result of this
operation does not give an agreement, it must be either Download
error or ROM error.
6-7. EMERGENCY HISTORY
### EMG. History ###
Laser Hours
CD
DVD
xxhxxm
xxhxxm
1.
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
2.
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
Select : 1-9
(1: Last EMG.)
6-9. VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [6] displays color bars
for video level adjustment. During display of color bars, OSD disappears but the menu screen will be restored if pressing any key.
Scroll : UP/DOWN
Exit : RETURN
On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [4] displays the information such as servo emergency history. The history information
from last “1” up to “10” can be scrolled with $ key or 4 key.
Also, specific information can be displayed by directly entering
that number with the ten-key pad from [1] to [9].
(Emergency history code is shown separately.)
The upper two lines display the laser ON total hours. Data below
minutes are omitted.
Clearing History Information
Clearing laser hours
Press [DISPLAY] and [CLEAR] keys in this order.
Both CD and DVD data are cleared.
Clearing emergency history
Press [TITLE] and [CLEAR] keys in this order.
Initializing setup data
Press [DVD menu] and [CLEAR] keys in this order.
The data have been initialized when “Set Up Initialized” message is displayed.
The EMG. History display screen will be restored soon.
6-11
6-10. IF CON SELF DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
2. OPERATION OF SELF CHECK MODE
1. IF-89 BOARD (IF CON) TEST MODE
The Self Check mode is the function to conduct the basic test to
the FL display and DVD panel section.
The IF-89 board (IF CON) test mode is the IF CON self-diagnosis
mode. The IF CON can diagnose the functions of the IF-89 board
that the IF CON controls. Normally, the IF CON makes a serial
communication with the SYSTEM CONTROL and operates following the commands from the SYSTEM CONTROL, but in the
Test mode, the IF CON operates independently from the SYSTEM CONTROL.
In the test mode, the following functions can be checked.
1. Button function
2. Remote commander receiving function
3. SYSTEM CONTROL-IF CON serial communication
4. Click shuttle function
5. Fluorescent display tube lighting check
Grid check
Anode check
6. LED control function
In the test mode, the main unit operates same as usual, except
voltage monitoring, communication monitoring, display of fluorescent display tube, and LED control.
1. The routine that monitors +3.3 V (PCONT) of MB-103 board
is not provided.
2. The monitoring timer for serial communication with the SYSTEM CONTROL is not provided. The main unit is not placed
in the Standby mode, even if the communication with SYSTEM CONTROL is normal.
3. Display of fluorescent display tube.
(Normally, display is made following the commands from SYSTEM CONTROL)
4. LED control.
(Normally, control is made following the commands from SYSTEM CONTROL)
6-12
2-1. Self Check Mode Transition Processing
At the AC Power ON after reset of IF CON is released with the
MB-103 board are not connected to the AV-61 board, or while
pressing the x key on the main unit with the IF CON in
STANDBY mode, enter [RETURN] t [DISPLAY] (or [SET UP])
on the remote commander, and the main unit transits to the Self
Check Mode.
2-2. Operation of Auto Self Check
When the Self Check mode becomes active at the AC Power ON or by key input, the test display of the following steps (1) to (4) is
repeated.
(1) FLD and LED all ON (for 5 seconds)
(2) MODEL display (for 2 seconds)
(3) Version display (for 2 seconds)
(4) ROM creation date display (for 2 seconds)
6-13
2-3. Each Self Check Function
Each Self Check function tests the FLD display, LED display, and
key input.
Input
Voltage [V]
IC404: Pin No. (Signal)
Pin ed (BNRKEY)
Pin ef (PLAY)
Pin eg (O/C)
Pin eh (TVS)
0 – 0.2
–
PLAY
OPEN/CLOSE
TVS
0.6 – 0.82
–
NEXT
–
PIC MODE
1.16 – 1.47
–
PREVIOUS
–
MODE
1.8 – 2.12
–
PAUSE
–
–
2.48 – 2.7
–
STOP
–
–
2-3-1. FLD and LED All ON
2-3-1-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode
• x key and Z key on the main unit
• % key on the main unit and the remote commander
2-3-1-2. Operation and Display
In this mode, all LEDs except STANDBY LED and all segments of
FLD turn ON.
• Example of FLD all ON
2-3-2. Main Unit Key Name Display and Key Code Display
2-3-2-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode
• Keys on the main unit except keys transited in Self Check Mode
2-3-2-2. Operation and Display
When a key on the main unit is pressed in the Self Check mode, the
name of that key is displayed on the FLD. Also, the key name display
and the key code display can be switched with the [DISPLAY] key on
the remote commander. “NOTHING” is displayed when nothing is
entered. Also, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD segments turn on when a
communication error occurred.
• FLD display (at input of H key on the main unit)
6-14
• Key code display
(at input of H key, key code: 0 Ah)
• At input of faulty voltage
• When key is pressed double
2-3-3. Remote Commander Key Name Display and Key
Code Display
2-3-3-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode
• Remote commander keys except keys transited in Self Check Mode
2-3-3-2. Operation and Display
When a key on the remote commander is pressed in the Self Check
Mode, the name of that key is displayed on the FLD. Also, the key
name display and the key code display can be switched with the
[DISPLAY] key on the remote commander. “NOTHING” is displayed
when nothing is entered. Also, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD segments
turn on when a communication error occurred.
• Remote commander key name display (at input of X key)
• Remote commander key code display
(at input of X key, key code: 39 h)
6-15
2-3-4. Communication Monitoring Display
The communication state is monitored and displayed while the
key name on the main unit and the remote commander is displayed.
When the communication to the System Controller failed, VIDEO
CD, DVD, and CD segments turn on.
• Communication error display
(at no input of key and remote commander)
• Communication error display
(at code display without input of the remote commander)
2-3-5. FLD Anode Test Display and SHUTTLE Click
Operation Test
2-3-5-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode
• 5 key on the remote commander
• SHUTTLE on the remote commander during Anode Test display
(This unit does not provide JOG/SHUTTLE, and therefore use
another DVD remote commander having the JOG/SHUTTLE)
2-3-5-2. Operation and Display
The Self Check Mode transits to this mode when 5 key is entered. This tests whether each segment turns on individually. Only
the first segment of each grid of FLD turns on, and each time the
SHUTTLE is entered, the segment of each grid is switched in order. When SHUTTLE input is clockwise, the segment switches in
1 – 2 – 3 direction, or counterclockwise it switches in 3 – 2 – 1
direction.
• Display at the start of Anode Test
r (Input in CW direction)
6-16
2-3-6. FLD Grid Test Display and SHUTTLE Click Operation Test
2-3-6-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode
• $ key on the remote commander
• SHUTTLE on the remote commander during Grid Test display
(This unit does not provide JOG/SHUTTLE, and therefore use another DVD remote commander having the JOG/SHUTTLE)
2-3-6-2. Operation and Display
The Self Check Mode transits to this mode when $ key is entered.
This tests whether each grid turns on individually. The first grid only
of FLD turns on and other grids turn off. Each time the SHUTTLE is
entered, the grid is switched in order. When SHUTTLE input is clockwise, the grid switches in 1 – 2 – 3 direction, or counterclockwise it
switches in 3 – 2 – 1 direction.
• Display at the start of Grid Test
r (Input in CW direction)
2-3-7. LED Test Display
2-3-7-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode
• 4 key on the remote commander
• SHUTTLE on the remote commander during Grid Test display
(This model does not provide JOG/SHUTTLE, and therefore use
another DVD remote commander having the JOG/SHUTTLE)
2-3-7-2. Operation and Display
LED is switched in order by the input of JOG/SHUTTLE on the remote commander. Also, LED ON/OFF is switched by the input of
same key as the function that turns on the LED concerned.
• FLD display during LED Test
6-17
2G
1G
7G
6G
5G
4G
3G
2G
1G
a
j
f
g
b
k
h
m
s
r
n
e
col
c
p
Dp
d
( 7G-1G)
ANODE CONNECTION
7G
6G
5G
4G
col
P1
3G
2G
1G
col
P2
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
P3
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
P4
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
P5
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
P6
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
P7
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
P8
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
P9
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
P10
g
g
g
g
g
g
g
P11
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
P12
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
P13
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
P14
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
P15
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
P16
d
d
d
d
d
d
d
Dp
Dp
Dp
Dp
Dp
Dp
P17
P18
P19
P20
6-18
1-3. Clock signal check
Measure the clock signal frequency at CPUCK (CL101) of
SYSCON (IC104) with an oscilloscope.
If the 8.25 MHz signal appears. t Check the machine according to section 1-3-1
If the 33 MHz signal appears. t Check the machine according to section 1-3-2.
If other frequencies are output.
R110 and R113 have defective soldering, X101 crystal oscillator is defective.
If the measurement point is fixed to either “H” or “L”. t
Observe XFRRST (pin-uh) of SYSCON (IC104) with an
oscilloscope.
If the measurement point is “L”, check the following items.
If the IC has defective soldering, if the IC is short-circuited.
If the measurement point is “H”,
t Component X101 or SYSCON (IC104) is defective.
6-11. TROUBLESHOOTING
6-11-1. Cannot Enter Test Mode
You cannot enter the Test mode when either button has been pressed
by any reason with the board assembled in the front panel. In this
state, the power does not turn on even under normal condition (the
unit is kept in standby state), and also no button is active and the
remote commander is not accepted. In this case, disconnect the
MB-103 board and AV-61 board, and with the SELF CHECK (pin
0) of IF CON (IC404) on the IF-89 board kept in low state, supply AC, and the IF CON self-diagnosis mode will be forcibly activated. The IF CON (IC404) checks the SELF CHECK port only
after the power on reset (only at AC supply, not in standby state).
If any button is pressed, its name is displayed on the fluorescent
display tube. But, if other than “NOTHING” is displayed though
no button is pressed, it means that any button has been pressed.
6-11-2. Faults in Test Mode (MB-103 board)
1. The test mode menu is not displayed.
1-1. Board visual check
Check that the ICs of SYSCON (IC104), ROM (IC106 or
IC107), AVD (IC403), ARP & SERVO (IC301) are working
correctly.
Check that outside appearance of the ICs is normal.
Check that IC pins are not short-circuited.
Check that there is no soldering error.
Check that outside appearance of the capacitors and resistors
is normal.
1-3-1. When the 8.25 MHz signal appears at CPUCK
• Check the XRD, XWRH and CS0X signal.
Observe XRD (pin-u;), XWRH (pin-ua), and CS0X (pin-tk)
of SYSCON (IC104) with an oscilloscope.
If these pins are fixed to either “L” (0V) or “H” (3.3V), or if
these pins stay in the center voltage, check the followings.
Check if the signal line does not have the defective soldering.
Check if the signal line is short-circuited with other signal
lines.
If you cannot find any problem t SYSCON (IC104) is
defective.
• HA [0 to 21] signal and HD [0 to 15] signal check
Observe HA [0 to 21] (pins-<z/x to <z/. , <zzz to <zz, , <zx/ , 1 to 5)
of SYSCON (IC104) and HD [0 to 15] (pins-ig to <z// ) with
an oscilloscope.
If these pins are fixed to either “L” (0V) or “H” (3.3V), or if
the HA pin stays in the center voltage, check the followings.
(HD stays in the center voltage when it is normal.)
t Check if the signal line does not have the defective
soldering, or is short-circuited with other signal line or
SYSCON (IC104) is defective.
• Reset signal check
Check if XFRRST (pin-uh) of SYSCON (IC104) normal or
not.
The signal starts up at the same time as Vcc t Defective
soldering.
1-2. Power supply voltage check
Check the power voltage of the power connector (CN102).
Check the power voltage of SYSCON (IC104).
Check the power voltage of ROM (IC106 or IC107).
Check the power voltage of AVD (IC403).
Check the power voltage of ARP & SERVO (IC301).
If the power voltage has any abnormality t
Check that the power supply lines are not shorted.
Check that there is no soldering error.
If any abnormality cannot be found still t
Check that each IC is working normally.
If the trouble does not apply to any of the above-described phenomenon, SYSCON (IC104) or ROM (IC106 or IC107) is defective.
6-19
1-3-2. When the 33 MHz signal appears at CPUCK
• WAIT signal check
Observe XWAIT (pin-yj) of SYSCON (IC104) with an oscilloscope.
If it is fixed to “L” (0V). t Observe CS2X to CS5X (pinsy; to yd).
If CS2X or CS3X is “L”. t AVD (IC403) has defective soldering or AVD is defective.
If CS4x or CS5X is “L”. t ARP & SERVO (IC301) has
defective soldering or ARP & SERVO is defective.
If any one of the above is not “L”. t XWAIT or CSnX is
short-circuited or has the defective soldering or AVD (IC403)
is defective or ARP & SERVO (IC301) is defective.
Center voltage t The XWAIT line has defective soldering
or is short-circuited or AVD (IC403) is defective or ARP &
SERVO (IC301) is defective or SYSCON (IC104) is defective.
• CSnX signal check
Observe CS0X to CS5X (pins-tk to yd) of SYSCON (IC104)
with an oscilloscope.
If they are fixed to “L” (0V) or if to center voltage t Check
that the ICs do not have the defective soldering or is shortcircuited with the other signal lines or SYSCON (IC104) is
defective.
CS0X: ROM (IC106 or IC107)
CS2X, CS3X: AVD (IC403)
CS4X, CS5X: ARP & SERVO (IC301)
If the trouble symptom does not apply to any of the above phenomenon, SYSCON (IC104) or ROM (IC106 or IC107) is defective.
2. Test mode menu is displayed but the machine stops
when menu is selected
2-1. AVD (IC403) check
Observe SDCLKO (pin-<zxm ) of AVD (IC403) with an oscilloscope.
95 MHz t No problem
27 MHz t Observe the XRST, HA, HD, XRD, XWRH INT
and CS signal waveform at the respective pins of AVDEC,
AVD (IC403) is defective.
If the signal is other than the above frequencies t AVD
(IC403) 27MHz signal line (CLKI (pin-<zb, ), SCLKIN (pin<zn/ )) is short-circuited, IC mount is defective, AVD (IC403) is
defective, PLL (IC103) is defective.
2-2. INT signal check
Observe INT0 to 2 (pins-qh to qk) of SYSCON (IC104) with
an oscilloscope.
If they are fixed to “L” (0V) or fixed to the center voltage t
Check that the ICs do not have the defective soldering, or are
short-circuited, SYSCON (IC104) is defective, or the following ICs are not defective.
INT0: AVD (IC403)
INT1, INT2: ARP & SERVO (IC301)
2-3. If any abnormality cannot be confirmed by the
above-described checks, check the CS signal that
is currently output.
The CS signal other than CS0X is being output. t IC mount
is defective or the IC is defective depending on the moving
CS signal.
CS2X, CS3X: AVD (IC403)
CS4X, CS5X: ARP & SERVO (IC301)
If the trouble is not applicable to any of the above phenomenon,
SYSCON (IC104) or ROM (IC106 or IC107) is defective.
6-20
3. If the message “SDSP No Ack” appears after the menu
is displayed.
3-1. ARP & SERVO clock signal check
Check frequency of CLKIN (pin-<zb/ )
33 MHz t Normal
Frequency other than 33 MHz t CLKIN is short-circuited
or defective soldering or PLL (IC103) is defective or ARP &
SERVO (IC301) is defective
3-2. ARP & SERVO (IC301) PLL oscillation check
Observe PLCKO (pin-ij) of ARP & SERVO (IC301) with an
oscilloscope.
If the pin is fixed to either “L” (0V) or “H” (3.3V).
If XRST if fixed to “L”. XRST has the defective soldering, In all other cases. ARP & SERVO (IC301) is defective
If it is oscillating.
HA [0 to 7] are HD [8 to 15] are short-circuited, check
XSDSPIT and XSDSPCS or ARP & SERVO (IC301) is
defective.
4. If trouble occurs at the specific item of the “Diag All
Check”.
IC mount of the NG item is defective or IC is defective.
5. Picture and sound are not output.
Check connection of CN601
Check for the defective connection of flat cable and check of
damage of the flat cable.
6. Picture is output but sound is not output.
Check the audio data output (at pins-wf, wk, and wl) of AVD
(IC403)
The audio data is not output. t AVD (IC403) or audio
DAC (IC601) mount is defective or power supply is defective or AVD (IC403) or audio DAC (IC601) is defective.
PLL (IC103) 512fs output check
If the frequency or waveform has abnormality. t The signal line has defective soldering or the signal line is shortcircuited with other signal lines or PLL (IC103) is defective.
7. Sound is output but picture is not output.
Observe pins-tg, tj, tl, ya, yd and yg of AVD (IC403) with
an oscilloscope.
If the analog signal is not output. t The signal line has the
defective soldering or is short-circuited or parts are defective
or AVD (IC403) is defective.
6-11-3. Drive Auto Adjustment stops due to error.
The ARP & SERVO (IC301) analog circuit of MB-103 board is
defective or RF-Amp (IC201) or M-Driver (IC202) peripheral circuit is defective or optical pickup block is defective or flat cable
connection is defective
6-11-4. The product itself is defective.
• If MB103 does not have any problem,
The board other than MB-103 board is defective or connection is defective or optical pickup block is defective or mechanism deck is defective
3-3. Check IFBSY (pin-5), XIFCS (pin-6), SI0 (pin-4),
SO0 (pin-1) and SC0 (pin-3) at CN101
If they are fixed to “H” or “L”.
t The signal line has defective soldering, or is short-circuited with other signal line, or parts are defective, or
SYSCON (IC104) is defective
If they change between “L/H”.
Connector installation is defective, or the IF-89 board is defective, or SYSCON (IC104) is defective.
If they stay in the center voltage.
Poor connection of flexible wiring board such as it is inserted
in an angle diagonally, or defective soldering, or is short-circuited with other signal line.
1. The red LED does not light when the AC power is
turned on.
Check the EVER –13V (pin-3), EVER+3.3V (pin-qa),
EVER+11V (pin-qd) voltage of the power supply block
CN201.
If voltage is abnormal. t The power supply block is defective.
2. The LED does not light in green even once when the
POWER button is pressed. It remains lighting in red
(in the STANDBY mode).
2-1. Check the EVER -13V (pin-3), EVER+3.3V (pin-qa),
EVER+11V (pin-qd) voltage at CN201 of the power
supply block/
If voltage is abnormal. t The power supply block is defective.
3-4. Check PONCHK (pin-e;) of IFCON (IC404) on the
IF-89 board.
If rise-up time from 0.5 V to 1.5 V or more takes longer time,
or it does not exceed 1.5 V or more. t The IF board is defective.
4. The LED lights in green but the fluorescent display
tube does not light when the POWER button is pressed.
Connection between the power supply block and the IF-89
board is defective, or connector installation is defective, or
the IF-89 board is defective.
2-2. Check if the fuse on the IF board has blown of not.
If the fuse has blown t Replace the fuse.
2-3. Check the P-CONT (pin-2) at CN401 of the IF-89
board when the POWER button is pressed.
If it remains at “L”,
t The signal line has the defective soldering or it is shortcircuited with other signal lines or capacitor or resistor is defective or IFCON is defective or connection between the power
supply block and the IF-89 board is defective, or connector
installation is defective, or the power supply block is defective.
5. Both picture and sound are not output.
Connection between the power supply block and the IF-89
board is defective, or connection between the IF-89 board and
the AV-61 board is defective, or connection between the AV61 board and the MB-103 board is defective, or connector
installation is defective, or AV-61 board is defective.
6. Picture is not normal. (Block noise or others appear.)
The MB-103 board AVD (IC403) or SDRAM (IC404, IC405)
is defective, or ARP & SERVO (IC301) is defective.
2-4. Check if the button is kept depressed in the IFCON
self mode.
If the button is kept depressed. t The front panel is defective, or IF-89 board is defective.
2-5. Check PONCHK (pin-e;) of IFCON (IC404) on the IF89 board.
If it is 0.5 V or more. t The power supply is defective, or IF89 board is defective.
3. If the LED lights in green but returns to red (STANDBY
mode) in several seconds when the POWER button is
pressed.
3-1. Check CN201 voltage of the power supply block
when the LED lights in green.
If voltage is abnormal. t The power supply block is defective, or the IF-89 board is defective, or MB103 is defective
3-2. Check XFRRST (pin-8) at CN101 on the MB-103
board.
If it is fixed to “L”. t The signal line has defective soldering, or is short-circuited with other signal lines, or parts are
defective.
6-21
MEMO
6-22E
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
SECTION 7
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT
In making adjustment, refer to 7-3. Adjustment Related
Parts Arrangement.
7-1. POWER SUPPLY CHECK
1.
This section describes procedures and instructions necessary for
adjusting electrical circuits in this unit.
Instruments required:
1) Color monitor TV
2) Oscilloscope 1 or 2 phenomena, band width over 100 MHz,
with delay mode
3) Frequency counter (over 8 digits)
4) Digital voltmeter
5) Standard commander (RMT-D126J)
6) DVD reference disc
HLX-501 (J-6090-071-A) (dual layer)
HLX-503 (J-6090-069-A) (single layer)
HLX-504 (J-6090-088-A) (single layer)
HLX-505 (J-6090-089-A) (dual layer)
7) SACD reference disc
HLXA-509 (J-6090-090-A)
8) Extension Cable (J-6090-107-A)
SRV1246JUC Board
Mode
E-E
Instrument
EVER +3.3 V Check
Digital voltmeter
Test point
Specification
CN201 pin qa
3.5 ± 0.2 Vdc
SW +3.3 V Check
Test point
CN201 pin 8
Specification
+5 V Check
3.3 ± 0.2 Vdc
Test point
Specification
CN201 pin qs
5.0 ± 0.3 Vdc
SW +11 V Check
Test point
CN201 pins 6, 7
Specification
EVER +11 V Check
11.0 ± 1.0 Vdc
Test point
Specification
CN201 pin qd
11.0 ± 1.0 Vdc
EVER –13 V Check
Test point
CN201 pin 3
Specification
–13.0 ± 1.0 Vdc
Checking method:
1) Confirm that each voltage satisfies the specification.
Note
Because the heatsink installed on the power supply board is a part of the
primary side, never touch it to avoid electrical shock.
7-1
7-2. ADJUSTMENT OF VIDEO SYSTEM
3.
1.
<Purpose>
This checks whether the S video output S-C satisfies the NTSC
standard. If it is not correct, the colors will be too dark or too light.
Mode
Video level adjustment in test mode
Video Level Adjustment (MB-103 BOARD)
<Purpose>
This adjustment is made to satisfy the NTSC standard, and if not
adjusted correctly, the brightness will be too large or too small.
Mode
Video level adjustment in test mode
Signal
Test point
Color bars
LINE OUT (VIDEO) connector
(75 Ω terminated)
Instrument
Adjusting element
Oscilloscope
RV501
Specification
1.0
+0.04
–0.02
Checking S Video Output S-C
Signal
Test point
Color bars
S VIDEO OUT (S-C) connector
(75 Ω terminated)
Instrument
Specification
Oscilloscope
286 ± 30 mVp-p
Checking method:
1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set
so that color bars are generated.
2) Confirm that the S-C burst is 286 ± 30 mVp-p
Vp-p
Adjusting method:
1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set
so that color bars are generated.
2) Adjust the RV401 to attain 1.0 +0.04
–0.02 Vp-p.
286 ± 30 mVp-p
+0.04
1.0 –0.02
Vp-p
Fig. 7-3.
4.
2.
Checking S Video Output S-Y
<Purpose>
Check S-terminal video output. If it is incorrect, pictures will not
be displayed correctly in spite of connection to the TV with a Sterminal cable.
Mode
Video level adjustment in test mode
Signal
Test point
Color bars
S VIDEO OUT (S-Y) connector
(75 Ω terminated)
Instrument
Specification
Oscilloscope
1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p
Checking Component Video Output Y
<Purpose>
This checks component video output Y. If it is incorrect, correct
brightness will not be attained when connected to, for instance,
projector.
Fig.7-1.
Mode
Signal
Video level adjustment in test mode
Color bars
Test point
Instrument
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y)
connector, D1 VIDEO OUT connector,
Pin 1 (75 Ω terminated)
Oscilloscope
Specification
1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p
Checking method:
1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set
so that color bars are generated.
2) Confirm that the Y level is 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p.
Checking method:
1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set
so that color bars are generated.
2) Confirm that the S-Y level is 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p.
1.0 ±0.05 Vp-p
1.0 ±0.05 Vp-p
Fig. 7-4.
Fig. 7-2.
7-2
5.
6.
Checking Component Video Output B-Y
<Purpose>
This checks component video output B-Y. If it is incorrect, correct
color will not be displayed when connected to, for instance,
component input projector.
Mode
Video level adjustment in test mode
Checking Component Video Output R-Y
<Purpose>
This checks component video output R-Y. If it is incorrect, correct
color will not be displayed when connected to, for instance,
component input projector.
Mode
Video level adjustment in test mode
Signal
Test point
Color bars
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (CB)
connector, D1 VIDEO OUT connector,
Pin 3 (75 Ω terminated)
Signal
Test point
Color bars
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (CR)
connector, D1 VIDEO OUT connector.
Pin 5 (75 Ω terminated)
Instrument
Specification
Oscilloscope
700 ± 50 mVp-p
Instrument
Specification
Oscilloscope
700 ± 50 mVp-p
Checking method:
1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set
so that color bars are generated.
2) Confirm that the B-Y level is 700 ± 50 mVp-p.
Checking method:
1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set
so that color bars are generated.
2) Confirm that the R-Y level is 700 ± 50 mVp-p.
700 ± 50mVp-p
700 ± 50mVp-p
Fig. 7-5.
Fig. 7-6.
7-3
7-3. ADJUSTMENT RELATED PARTS
ARRANGEMENT
MB-103 BOARD (Side A)
VIDEO LEVEL ADJ
RV401
IC403
SRV1246JUC BOARD (Side A)
1
13
CN201
7-4E
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
SECTION 8
REPAIR PARTS LIST
8-1. EXPLODED VIEWS
NOTE:
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may
have some differences from the original one.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they
are seldom required for routine service. Some
delay should be anticipated when ordering these
items.
•
The mechanical parts with no reference number
in the exploded views are not supplied.
The components identified by mark 0or
dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
le numéro spécifié.
8-1
8-1-1. MAIN SECTION
ns : not supplied
5
e
13
12
c
5
ns
5
14
mechanism
deck section
f
5
4
5
3
e
a
5
ns
15
11
12
10
ns
ns
ns
ns
1
14
b
c
2
b
6
16
20
19
a
ns
17
f
22
8-2
21
18
Ref. No.
1
1
1
1
1
Part No.
Description
Remarks
X-3952-267-1 PANEL ASSY,FRONT (NS415:ME5,AUS)
X-3952-268-1 PANEL ASSY,FRONT (NS415:US,CND)
X-3952-269-1 PANEL ASSY,FRONT
(NS315:US1,US3,US4,CND1,PX)
X-3952-270-1 PANEL ASSY,FRONT (NS315:US2,CND2)
X-3952-271-1 PANEL ASSY,FRONT
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,KR)
Ref. No.
Part No.
0 11
1-575-651-21 CORD, POWER
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU,ME2,EA,ME5,HK,SP/NS310/
NS315:PX,E,AR/NS405/NS410/NS415:ME5)
1-757-140-11 CORD, POWER
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,SP/NS315:PX,E,AR,BR/NS415:ME5)
1-757-571-11 CORD, POWER
(NS315:US,CND/NS415:US,CND)
1-782-752-31 CORD, POWER (NS305:KR)
1-783-531-11 CORD, POWER (NS315:MX)
0 11
0 11
0 11
0 11
1
1
1
1
1
X-3952-272-1
X-3952-356-1
X-3952-357-1
X-3952-358-1
X-3952-360-1
PANEL ASSY,FRONT (NS305:SP,TW)
PANEL ASSY,FRONT (NS405:AEP1,AEP2)
PANEL ASSY,FRONT (NS405:AEP11,AEP21,UK)
PANEL ASSY,FRONT (NS305:AEP1,AEP2,RU2)
PANEL ASSY,FRONT (NS310)
1
1
1
1
1
X-3952-484-1
A-6060-865-A
X-3952-354-1
X-3952-355-1
X-3952-359-1
PANEL ASSY,FRONT (NS410)
PANEL ASSY,FRONT (NS315:AR,BR)
PANEL ASSY,FRONT (NS315:MX1,E)
PANEL ASSY,FRONT (NS315:MX2)
PANEL ASSY,FRONT
(NS305:AEP11,AEP21,UK,RU1)
2
2
3
3
3-066-225-01 SONY BADGE (5-A)
(NS315:US1,US3,US4,CND1,PX,MX2/NS415:ME5,AUS)
3-066-225-11 SONY BADGE (5-A)
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU,ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,KR/NS310/
NS315:US2,CND2,MX1,E,AR,BR/NS405/NS410/NS415:US,CND)
4-963-404-41 SONY BADGE (5-A) (NS305:SP,TW)
3-073-770-01 COVER,TRAY (NS315:US,CND,PX/NS415)
3-073-770-11 COVER,TRAY (NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,KR)
3
3
3
3
3-073-770-21
3-073-770-31
3-074-444-01
3-074-444-11
0 11
0 11
0 11
0 11
12
12
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
10
10
COVER,TRAY (NS305:SP,TW)
COVER,TRAY (NS315:MX,E,AR,BR)
COVER,TRAY (NS305:AEP1,AEP2,RU2)
COVER,TRAY
(NS305:AEP11,AEP21,UK,RU1/NS310)
3-074-481-01 COVER(EU),TRAY (NS405:AEP1,AEP2)
13
13
13
13
? 13
14
15
16
17
3-074-481-11 COVER(EU),TRAY
(NS405:AEP11,AEP21,UK/NS410)
1-468-645-11 POWER BLOCK
(NS305:TW/NS315:US,CND,MX/NS415:US,CND)
1-468-646-11 POWER BLOCK
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,KR/
NS315:AR/NS415:ME5,AUS)
1-468-647-11 POWER BLOCK (NS315:PX,E,BR)
1-468-648-11 POWER BLOCK
(NS305:AEP,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
3-970-608-01 SUMITITE (B3), +BV
3-073-182-01 BUSHING, CODE
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/
NS315:US1,US2,US3,CND,PX/NS415)
3-073-182-11 BUSHING, CODE
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU,NS310/
NS315:US4,MX,E,AR,BR/NS405/NS410)
17
17
17
18
19
? 19
8-3
20
20
22
Description
Remarks
1-783-531-31 CORD, POWER
(NS315:US,CND,MX/NS415:US,CND)
1-790-390-41 CORD, POWER (NS305:TW)
1-790-588-11 CORD, POWER (NS305:AUS/NS415:AUS)
1-823-597-11 CORD, POWER
(NS315:US,CND/NS415:US,CND)
3-070-883-01 SCREW, TAPPING
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,RU2/NS315:US1,US3,US4,CND1,PX,MX2/
NS405:AEP1,AEP2/NS415:ME5,AUS)
3-070-883-11 SCREW, TAPPING
(NS305:AEP11,AEP21,UK,RU1,ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/
NS310/NS315:US2,CND2,MX1,E,AR,BR/
NS405:AEP11,AEP21,UK/NS410/NS415:US,CND)
3-073-832-31 CASE, UPPER (NS415:AUS)
3-073-832-41 CASE, UPPER
(NS305:EA,ME5,AUS,HK,KR/NS315:CND2/NS415:US,CND)
3-073-832-51 CASE, UPPER (NS305:TW)
3-074-466-21 CASE,UPPER
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2/NS405:AEP1,AEP2)
3-073-832-71 CASE, UPPER (NS315:MX1,E,AR,BR)
3-970-608-51 SUMITITE (B3), +BV
(NS305,NS310/NS315:US1,US2,US3,CND,PX,MX,E,AR,BR/
NS405/NS410/NS415)
1-961-634-11 PF-127 (HERNESS)
1-961-632-11 FF-206 (NS415)
1-477-167-11 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D141A)
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315)
1-477-168-11 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D142A)
(NS415:US,CND)
1-477-168-41 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D142O)
(NS415:ME5,AUS)
1-477-170-11 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D142P)
(NS310/NS405/NS410)
3-072-138-01 LID, BATTERY (FOR REMOTE COMMANDER)
3-073-777-11 EMBLEM,DVD (NS305:AEP1,AEP2,RU2)
3-073-777-41 EMBLEM,DVD
(NS305:AEP11,AEP21,UK,RU1,NS310/NS315:AR,BR)
3-959-372-21 CUSHION, FOOT (NS315:AR,BR)
X-395-017-51 CUSHION, FOOT (NS315:MX,E)
1-823-831-11 FAE-9
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
Note :
The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number
specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par
une marque 0 sont critiques
pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une
pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
8-1-2. MECHANISM DECK SECTION
ns : not supplied
61
ns
53
52
60
ns
a
a
ns
M001
ns
S001
55
55
ns
CN001
58
55
54
8-4
56
57
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
51
52
53
54
55
A-60603-053-843-01
7-621-775-08
1-823-830-11
3-053-847-11
LOADING ASSY
MOTOR PULLEY
SCREW +P 2.6X3
FMS-17 (FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE)
INSULATOR
56
57
58
59
60
3-067-344-01 INSULATOR SCREW
1-823-829-11 FMO-4 (FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE)
1-823-828-11 FMM-41 (FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE)
60
61
M001
S001
CN001
3-053-841-21
4-974-711-01
1-763-790-11
1-786-133-11
1-815-412-11
Remarks
Ref. No.
3-053-841-01 PULLEY GEAR
GEAR, PULLEY
SCREW (2X5)(P TYIGHT),(+)PTTWH
MOTOR, DC (LOADING)
SWITCH, ROTARY
CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P
3-058-511-51 +BV IBR (NS315:US4)
8-5
Part No.
Description
Remarks
AV-61
8-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
NOTE:
• Due to standardization, replacements in the
parts list may be different from the parts
specified in the diagrams or the components
used on the set.
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may
have some difference from the original one.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they
are seldom required for routine service. Some
delay should be anticipated when ordering these
items.
• CAPACITORS:
uF: µF
• COILS
uH: µH
Ref. No.
Part No.
•
•
RESISTORS
All resistors are in ohms.
METAL: metal-film resistor
METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor
F: nonflammable
SEMICONDUCTORS
In each case, u: µ, for example:
uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... ,
uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... ,
uPD..., µPD...
Remarks
Ref. No.
AV-61BM (G) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR)
**************************************
AV-61BM (U) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS315:US,CND,PX,AR,BR)
**************************************
AV-61BR (E) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310)
**************************************
AV-61BX (U) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS315:MX1,MX2,E)
**************************************
AV-61BY (U) BOARD, COMPLETE (NS315:US)
*************************************
AV-61SM (ME) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS415:ME5,AUS)
**************************************
AV-61SM (U) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS415:US,CND)
**************************************
AV-61SR (E) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS405/NS410)
**************************************
Description
C213
C215
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
ELECT
0.01uF
47uF
0.047uF
47uF
47uF
10%
20%
10%
20%
20%
C112
C113
C114
C201
C202
1-164-004-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
10%
25V
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/
NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415)
1-126-947-11 ELECT
47uF
20%
16V
1-164-004-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF
10%
25V
1-163-135-00 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF
5%
50V
1-163-135-00 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF
5%
50V
C203
C204
C205
C206
C207
1-163-257-11
1-163-257-11
1-163-257-11
1-163-257-11
1-162-970-11
C208
C209
C210
C211
C212
1-162-970-11
1-126-960-11
1-126-947-11
1-126-947-11
1-126-960-11
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
le numéro spécifié.
Description
Remarks
C222
C223
C224
C227
C228
C229
C242
1-126-947-11
1-126-947-11
1-126-947-11
1-126-947-11
1-126-924-11
C244
1-126-947-11 ELECT
1-126-934-11 ELECT
1-163-259-91 CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
ELECT
ELECT
ELECT
ELECT
47uF
47uF
47uF
47uF
330uF
20%
20%
20%
20%
20%
16V
16V
16V
16V
6.3V
47uF
20%
16V
< CONNECTOR >
CN102
* CN202
25V
16V
25V
16V
16V
1-815-149-11 CONNECTOR, FPC/FFC(1MM PIC)21P
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
1-568-934-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 7P
< DIODE >
D101
D105
1-162-970-11
1-126-947-11
1-163-809-11
1-126-947-11
1-126-947-11
The components identified by mark 0 or
dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
220uF
20%
16V
220PF
5%
50V
(NS305/NS310/NS405/NS410)
1-163-259-91 CERAMIC CHIP 220PF
5%
50V
(NS305/NS310/NS405/NS410)
1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
C216
< CAPACITOR >
C101
C102
C109
C110
C111
Part No.
When indicating parts by reference number,
please include the board name.
D106
D201
D202
D203
D205
D206
8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 (NS415:US,CND)
8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/
NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415)
8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/
NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415)
8-719-050-38 DIODE M1MA152WK-T1
8-719-050-37 DIODE M1MA152WA-T1
8-719-050-37 DIODE M1MA152WA-T1
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0
8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 (NS415:US,CND)
< IC >
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
180PF
180PF
180PF
180PF
0.01uF
5%
5%
5%
5%
10%
50V
50V
50V
50V
25V
IC102
IC102
CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
ELECT
1uF
20%
50V
ELECT
47uF
20%
16V
ELECT
47uF
20%
16V
ELECT
1uF
20%
50V
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
IC103
IC204
IC204
IC201
IC201
IC203
8-6
8-759-826-46 IC LA73051-TLM
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
8-759-826-45 IC LA73050-TLM
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315/NS415)
8-759-662-86 IC NJM79M05DL1A(TE2)
8-749-017-31 IC GP1FA550TZ (NS405/NS410/NS415)
8-749-923-04 IC TOTX178A (NS405/NS410/NS415)
6-701-937-01 IC TJM4558CDT
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
8-759-909-71 IC BA4558F-E2
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315/NS415)
8-759-711-59 IC NJM78L05UA-TE1
AV-61
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
Ref. No.
Part No.
< JACK >
J102
J102
J103
J103
J104
J104
J201
1-816-668-11 JACK, PIN (3P) (NS315:US4)
1-815-360-11 JACK, PIN 3P
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315/NS415)
1-816-663-11 CONNECTOR, S TERMINAL (4P) (NS315:US4)
1-794-198-11 CONNECTOR, S TERMINAL
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/
NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415)
1-815-362-21 JACK, PIN (6P) (NS415:US,CND)
R121
1-815-358-11 JACK, PIN (3P)
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415:ME5,AUS)
1-793-446-21 JACK, PIN 1P
R128
R122
R126
R127
R129
JR100
JR101
JR102
JR104
JR105
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
0
0
0
0
0
JR106
JR107
JR108
JR109
JR110
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
0
0
0
0
0
JR111
JR112
JR113
1-216-295-91 SHORT
1-216-295-91 SHORT
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
0
0
R130
R133
R134
R153
R154
< COIL >
1-412-064-11 INDUCTOR
100uH
< TRANSISTOR >
Q104
Q201
Q202
8-729-421-19 TRANSISTOR
MUN2213T1
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/
NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415)
8-729-424-08 TRANSISTOR
MUN2111T1
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/
NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415)
8-729-216-22 TRANSISTOR
2SA1162-YG-TE85L
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
8-729-049-31 TRANSISTOR
2SB710A-RTX
8-729-421-19 TRANSISTOR
UN2213-TX
Q203
Q204
Q205
Q206
8-729-230-49
8-729-027-53
8-729-424-02
8-729-421-19
Q105
Q106
Q207
Q208
Q209
Q210
Q211
Q216
Remarks
< RESISTOR >
< JUMPER RESISTOR >
L101
Description
TRANSISTOR
2SC2712-YG-TE85L
TRANSISTOR
DTC124TKA-T146
TRANSISTOR
2SB709A-QRS-TX
TRANSISTOR
UN2213-TX
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
6-550-137-01 TRANSISTOR
SD1938(F)-ST(TX).SO
6-550-137-01 TRANSISTOR
SD1938(F)-ST(TX).SO
8-729-027-53 TRANSISTOR
DTC124TKA-T146
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
8-729-424-02 TRANSISTOR
2SB709A-QRS-TX
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
8-729-230-49 TRANSISTOR
2SC2712-YG-TE85L
8-729-424-02 TRANSISTOR
2SB709A-QRS-TX
8-7
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/
NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415)
1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP
1K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP
68
5%
1/10W
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315/NS415)
1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP
68
5%
1/10W
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315/NS415)
1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP
68
5%
1/10W
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315/NS415)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/
NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415)
1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP
68
5%
1/10W
1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP
68
5%
1/10W
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/
NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415)
1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP
68
5%
1/10W
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/
NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415)
1-215-860-11 METAL OXIDE
33
5%
1W
R201
R202
R203
R204
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415:ME5,AUS)
1-208-798-11 METAL CHIP
4.7K
0.5% 1/10W
1-208-798-11 METAL CHIP
4.7K
0.5% 1/10W
1-208-798-11 METAL CHIP
4.7K
0.5% 1/10W
1-208-798-11 METAL CHIP
4.7K
0.5% 1/10W
R205
R206
R207
R208
R209
1-208-800-11
1-208-800-11
1-216-057-00
1-216-057-00
1-216-057-00
R210
R211
R212
R213
R214
1-216-057-00
1-208-800-11
1-208-800-11
1-216-065-91
1-216-065-91
R216
R217
R218
R219
R220
1-216-067-00
1-216-073-91
1-216-097-11
1-216-105-91
1-216-041-00
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
5.6K
10K
100K
220K
470
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R221
R222
R224
R225
R226
1-216-073-91
1-216-073-91
1-216-073-91
1-216-089-91
1-216-041-00
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
10K
10K
10K
47K
470
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R227
R228
R229
R230
R231
1-216-041-00
1-216-073-91
1-216-089-91
1-216-089-91
1-216-073-91
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
5.6K
5.6K
2.2K
2.2K
2.2K
0.5%
0.5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
METAL CHIP
2.2K
5%
1/10W
METAL CHIP
5.6K
0.5% 1/10W
METAL CHIP
5.6K
0.5% 1/10W
RES-CHIP
4.7K
5%
1/10W
RES-CHIP
4.7K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
METAL CHIP
470
5%
1/10W
RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
RES-CHIP
47K
5%
1/10W
RES-CHIP
47K
5%
1/10W
RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
AV-61
Ref. No.
R232
R233
R234
R235
R236
R237
ER-14
Part No.
Description
Remarks
R240
R241
1-216-065-91 RES-CHIP
4.7K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP
100K
5%
1/10W
1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP
100K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP
470
5%
1/10W
1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP
470
5%
1/10W
R244
1-216-089-91 RES-CHIP
47K
R245
1-216-089-91 RES-CHIP
47K
R249
R251
R252
1-216-033-00 METAL CHIP
1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
220
68
10K
R253
R254
R256
R284
1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP
1K
5%
1/10W
1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP
1K
5%
1/10W
1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP
1K
5%
1/10W
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415:ME5,AUS)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415:ME5,AUS)
R238
R239
R285
R286
Ref. No.
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
1-216-089-91 RES-CHIP
47K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
1-216-065-91 RES-CHIP
4.7K
5%
1/10W
1-216-065-91 RES-CHIP
4.7K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315/NS415)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
5%
1/10W
(NS415:US,CND)
5%
1/10W
(NS415:US,CND)
5%
1/10W
5%
1/10W
5%
1/10W
0
Part No.
Description
Remarks
< DIODE >
D901
D907
D917
D918
D919
8-719-073-01
8-719-050-37
8-719-067-40
8-719-067-40
8-719-067-40
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
MA111-(K8).S0
M1MA152WA-T1
STZ6.8N-T146
STZ6.8N-T146
STZ6.8N-T146
D920
D929
D930
8-719-067-40 DIODE STZ6.8N-T146
8-719-056-82 DIODE UDZ-TE-17-6.2B
8-719-977-40 DIODE UDZ-TE-17-13B
< FERRITE BEAD >
FB907
FB908
FB909
FB910
1-414-766-22
1-414-766-22
1-414-766-22
1-414-766-22
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
0UH
0UH
0UH
0UH
< IC >
IC901
8-759-826-47 IC LA73052-TLM
< JUMPER RESISTOR >
JR901
JR902
JR905
JR906
JR907
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
0
0
0
0
0
JR908
JR909
JR910
JR911
JR912
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
SHORT
0
0
0
0
0
JR913
JR914
JR915
1-216-295-91 SHORT
1-216-295-91 SHORT
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
0
0
< RELAY >
RY102 1-755-037-11 RELAY (NS415:US,CND)
RY201 1-755-466-11 RELAY (PLASTIC SEAL) (NS415:US,CND)
************************************************************
< COIL >
ER-14R BOARD, COMPLETE
(European model only)
**************************************
L905
1-412-064-11 INDUCTOR
100uH
< TRANSISTOR >
< CAPACITOR >
C901
C902
C903
C905
C907
1-126-947-11
1-126-947-11
1-126-947-11
1-126-947-11
1-126-947-11
ELECT
ELECT
ELECT
ELECT
ELECT
47uF
47uF
47uF
47uF
47uF
20%
20%
20%
20%
20%
16V
16V
16V
16V
16V
C913
C914
C943
C945
C962
1-127-715-91
1-127-715-91
1-162-927-11
1-162-927-11
1-162-927-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.22uF
0.22uF
100PF
100PF
100PF
10%
10%
5%
5%
5%
16V
16V
50V
50V
50V
C963
1-162-927-11 CERAMIC CHIP
100PF
5%
50V
Q901
Q902
Q903
Q906
Q907
8-729-421-19
8-729-422-27
8-729-424-08
8-729-421-19
8-729-424-08
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
Q908
8-729-421-22 TRANSISTOR
UN2213-TX
2SD601A-QRS-TX
UN2111-TX
UN2213-TX
UN2111-TX
UN2211-TX
< RESISTOR >
R902
R905
R906
R907
R908
1-216-295-91
1-216-089-91
1-216-089-91
1-216-089-91
1-216-105-91
SHORT
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
0
47K
47K
47K
220K
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R909
R910
R911
R912
R914
1-216-037-00
1-216-037-00
1-216-037-00
1-216-037-00
1-216-055-00
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
330
330
330
330
1.8K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
< CONNECTOR >
CN901
1-815-387-11 CONNECTOR, FPC/FFC 21P
8-8
ER-14
Ref. No.
Remarks
Ref. No.
FL-126
IF-89
Part No.
Description
Part No.
Description
R915
R916
R917
R918
R924
1-216-045-00
1-216-055-00
1-216-055-00
1-216-021-00
1-216-041-00
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
680
1.8K
1.8K
68
470
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
C416
C417
C418
C420
C421
1-104-665-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-128-551-11
ELECT
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
100uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
22uF
20%
10%
10%
10%
20%
25V
25V
25V
25V
25V
R926
R927
R928
R929
R939
1-216-041-00
1-216-021-00
1-216-021-00
1-216-021-00
1-216-017-91
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
470
68
68
68
47
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
C423
C424
C425
C426
C427
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
1-128-551-11
1-163-021-91
1-107-826-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.1uF
22uF
0.01uF
0.1uF
10%
10%
20%
10%
10%
25V
16V
25V
50V
16V
C428
1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP
0.1uF
10%
16V
R950
1-216-081-00 METAL CHIP
22K
5%
1/10W
R957
1-414-233-22 FERRITE
0UH
R958
1-414-233-22 FERRITE
0UH
************************************************************
< CONNECTOR >
FL-126 (E) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
**************************************
FL-126X BOARD, COMPLETE (NS315:MX,E)
***********************************
CN401
* CN405
1-506-478-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 13P
1-785-530-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 10P
(NS305/NS310/NS315:US,CND,PX,AR,BR/NS405/NS410/NS415)
1-564-002-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 3P (NS415)
< DIODE >
8-719-064-11 DIODE SPR-325MVW (NS405/NS410/NS415)
< IC >
1-564-013-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 3P
IC403
IC404
IC405
IC406
IC407
< DIODE >
D301
CN406
D402
< CONNECTOR >
CN301
Remarks
6-500-176-01 DIODE EB3804X-TP-J555K
< RESISTOR >
6-701-875-01
6-801-258-01
8-759-684-35
6-600-054-01
6-701-835-01
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
LMS8117ADTX-1.8/NOPB
86CK74AFG-3ND0(M
S-80830ANUP-EDT-T2
GP1UD24SYK
AN13990A-NML
< JUMPER RESISTOR >
R301
1-216-033-00 METAL CHIP
220
5%
1/10W
************************************************************
IF-89BM (U) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/
NS315:US,CND,PX,AR,BR)
**************************************
IF-89BX (U) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS315:MX1,MX2,E)
**************************************
IF-89BY (U) BOARD, COMPLETE (NS315:US4)
*************************************
IF-89SM (U) BOARD, COMPLETE (NS415)
*********************************
IF-89BR (E) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310)
**************************************
IF-89SR (E) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS405,NS410)
**************************************
JR401
JR402
JR403
JR404
JR405
JR406
JR407
JR408
JR409
JR410
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
< CAPACITOR >
JR411
C401
C402
C404
C405
C407
1-126-947-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
ELECT
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
47uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
20%
10%
10%
10%
10%
16V
25V
25V
25V
25V
C408
C409
C411
C414
C415
1-119-774-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-964-11
ELECT
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
100uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.001uF
20%
10%
10%
10%
10%
16V
25V
25V
25V
50V
JR412
JR413
JR414
JR415
8-9
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
IF-89
Ref. No.
JR416
JR417
JR418
JR419
JR420
ND401
ND401
Remarks
Ref. No.
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
Part No.
Description
R418
< FLUORESCENT INDICATOR >
R429
1-518-805-11 TUBE, FLUORESCENT INDICATOR
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315/NS415)
1-518-807-11 TUBE, FLUORESCENT INDICATOR
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/
NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410)
R430
< IC LINK >
0 PS401
0 PS402
Q405
1-576-509-21 RINK, IC
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-576-508-21 RINK, IC
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
R402
R405
R406
R407
R408
R409
R410
R411
R412
R413
R414
R415
R416
R417
R426
R428
R432
R434
R437
R438
R441
8-729-048-28 TRANSISTOR
2SD1766-T100-QR
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
8-729-424-08 TRANSISTOR
UN2111-TX
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
< RESISTOR >
R401
R425
R436
< TRANSISTOR >
Q404
R424
R442
R443
R444
1-216-017-91 RES-CHIP
47
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP
100K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-081-00 METAL CHIP
22K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-071-00 METAL CHIP
8.2K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-013-00 METAL CHIP
33
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
R445
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-063-91 RES-CHIP
3.9K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-063-91 RES-CHIP
3.9K
5%
1/10W
(NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-059-00 METAL CHIP
2.7K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-059-00 METAL CHIP
2.7K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
R453
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP
1.8K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP
1.8K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
R459
8-10
R446
R447
R448
R452
R455
R456
R457
R458
R460
Part No.
Description
Remarks
1-216-027-00 METAL CHIP
120
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP
100
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP
100K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP
100
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP
100
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP
100
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP
100
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP
100
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP
100
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP
100
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-029-00 METAL CHIP
150
5%
1/10W
(NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-215-857-11 METAL OXIDE
10
5%
1W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-427-00 METAL OXIDE
120
5%
1W
( /NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-427-00 METAL OXIDE
120
5%
1W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-029-00 METAL CHIP
150
5%
1/10W
(NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-081-00 METAL CHIP
22K
5%
1/10W
(NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-298-00 METAL CHIP
2.2
5%
1/10W
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/10W
< SWITCH >
S401
S402
S403
S404
S405
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
SWITCH, KEYBOARD
SWITCH, KEYBOARD
SWITCH, KEYBOARD
SWITCH, KEYBOARD
SWITCH, KEYBOARD
IF-89
Ref. No.
S406
S407
S408
S409
Part No.
Description
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
1-771-349-21
SWITCH, KEYBOARD
SWITCH, KEYBOARD
SWITCH, KEYBOARD
SWITCH, KEYBOARD (NS405/NS410/NS415)
Remarks
Ref. No.
C106
Remarks
C108
C109
C110
C111
C114
C118
C120
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
25V
25V
C121
C122
C125
C126
C127
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-126-607-11
1-126-206-11
1-126-204-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
ELECT CHIP
ELECT CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
47uF
100uF
47uF
10%
10%
20%
20%
20%
25V
25V
4V
6.3V
16V
C128
C129
C201
C202
C203
1-126-246-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-964-11
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
220uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.001uF
20%
10%
10%
10%
10%
4V
25V
25V
25V
50V
C204
C210
C211
C212
C213
1-162-964-11
1-162-966-11
1-162-966-11
1-162-966-11
1-162-966-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.001uF
0.0022uF
0.0022uF
0.0022uF
0.0022uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
50V
50V
50V
50V
50V
C214
C215
C216
C218
C219
1-164-245-11
1-162-927-11
1-164-230-11
1-162-965-11
1-107-826-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.015uF
100PF
220PF
0.0015uF
0.1uF
10%
5%
5%
10%
10%
25V
50V
50V
50V
16V
C220
C221
C225
C226
C228
1-107-826-11
1-124-779-00
1-162-927-11
1-164-230-11
1-162-964-11
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.1uF
10uF
100PF
220PF
0.001uF
10%
20%
5%
5%
10%
16V
16V
50V
50V
50V
C229
C230
C232
C233
C234
1-162-964-11
1-162-968-11
1-162-968-11
1-162-968-11
1-126-205-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
0.001uF
0.0047uF
0.0047uF
0.0047uF
47uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
20%
50V
50V
50V
50V
6.3V
C235
C236
C238
C240
C241
1-162-970-11
1-164-739-11
1-124-779-00
1-164-677-11
1-107-826-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
560PF
10uF
0.033uF
0.1uF
10%
5%
20%
10%
10%
25V
50V
16V
16V
16V
C242
C243
C244
C245
C246
1-126-205-11
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
1-162-970-11
1-164-677-11
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
47uF
0.01uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
0.033uF
20%
10%
10%
10%
10%
6.3V
25V
16V
25V
16V
C247
C248
C249
C250
C251
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.1uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
25V
16V
C107
< VIBRATOR >
MB-103BM (GA) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS305:HK,SP,TW,KR)
**************************************
MB-103BM (IN) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS305:ME2)
**************************************
MB-103BM (ME) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS305:EA,ME5)
**************************************
MB-103BM (OC) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS305:AUS)
**************************************
MB-103BM (UC) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS315:US,CND,PX)
**************************************
MB-103BR (E1) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS305:AEP1,UK/NS310:AEP1)
**************************************
MB-103BR (E2) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS305:AEP2/NS310:AEP2)
**************************************
MB-103BR (RU) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS305:RU)
**************************************
MB-103BX (LA) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS315:MX1,MX2,E,AR,BR)
**************************************
MB-103BY (U) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS315:US4)
**************************************
MB-103SM (ME) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS415:ME5)
**************************************
MB-103SM (OC) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS415:AUS)
**************************************
MB-103SM (UC) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS415:US,CND)
**************************************
MB-103SR (E1) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS405:AEP1,UK/NS410:AEP1)
**************************************
MB-103SR (E2) BOARD, COMPLETE
(NS405:AEP2/NS410:AEP2)
**************************************
Description
1-162-914-11 CERAMIC CHIP 9PF
0.50PF 50V
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315/NS415)
1-162-917-11 CERAMIC CHIP 15PF
5%
50V
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
1-162-914-11 CERAMIC CHIP 9PF
0.50PF 50V
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315/NS415)
1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
1-126-209-11 ELECT CHIP
100uF
20%
4V
C107
X401
1-781-472-21 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (8MHz)
************************************************************
Part No.
MB-103
< CAPACITOR >
C102
C103
C104
C105
C106
1-162-970-11
1-126-209-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-916-11
CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
ELECT CHIP
100uF
20%
4V
CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
CERAMIC CHIP 12PF
5%
50V
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
8-11
MB-103
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Part No.
Description
C252
C253
C254
C255
C256
1-107-826-11
1-162-964-11
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
1-165-176-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.1uF
0.001uF
0.01uF
0.1uF
0.047uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
16V
50V
25V
16V
16V
Remarks
Ref. No.
C401
C402
C403
C404
C405
1-124-779-00
1-124-779-00
1-162-970-11
1-126-193-11
1-126-246-11
ELECT CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT
ELECT CHIP
10uF
10uF
0.01uF
1uF
220uF
20%
20%
10%
20%
20%
16V
16V
25V
50V
4V
C257
C258
C259
C260
C261
1-165-176-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-964-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-959-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.047uF
0.01uF
0.001uF
0.01uF
330PF
10%
10%
10%
10%
5%
16V
25V
50V
25V
50V
C406
C407
C408
C410
C412
1-124-779-00
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
10uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
20%
10%
10%
10%
10%
16V
25V
25V
25V
25V
C262
C263
C264
C265
C266
1-107-826-11
1-124-779-00
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.1uF
10uF
0.01uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
10%
20%
10%
10%
10%
16V
16V
25V
16V
25V
C413
C415
C416
C417
C418
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
25V
25V
C270
C271
C272
C273
C304
1-162-970-11
1-126-204-11
1-107-826-11
1-107-826-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
47uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
10%
20%
10%
10%
10%
25V
16V
16V
16V
25V
C419
C420
C422
C423
C425
1-107-826-11
1-107-826-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.1uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
16V
16V
25V
25V
25V
C305
C308
C309
C310
C311
1-162-968-11
1-126-206-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-927-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
ELECT CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.0047uF
100uF
0.01uF
100PF
0.01uF
10%
20%
10%
5%
10%
50V
6.3V
25V
50V
25V
C426
C428
C429
C431
C432
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
25V
25V
C312
C313
C314
C315
C316
1-110-563-11
1-164-677-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-968-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.068uF
0.033uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.0047uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
16V
16V
25V
25V
50V
C435
C436
C438
C439
C441
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
(NS305/NS310/NS405/NS410/NS415:ME5,AUS)
C317
C318
C319
C320
C321
1-107-826-11
1-162-968-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-968-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.1uF
0.0047uF
0.01uF
0.0047uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
16V
50V
25V
50V
25V
C442
C322
C323
C324
C325
C326
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-107-826-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.1uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
16V
25V
25V
C449
C602
1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
(NS305/NS310/NS405/NS410/NS415:ME5,AUS)
1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
(NS305/NS310/NS405/NS410/NS415:ME5,AUS)
1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF
10%
25V
1-127-715-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF
10%
16V
C603
C604
1-124-779-00 ELECT CHIP
1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP
C327
C328
C329
C330
C331
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-968-11
1-107-826-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.0047uF
0.1uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
50V
16V
C332
C333
C334
C335
C337
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
25V
25V
C338
C339
C340
C343
C344
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
1-162-970-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
0.01uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
25V
25V
25V
25V
25V
C446
C447
Remarks
10uF
0.01uF
20%
10%
< CONNECTOR >
* CN102
* CN103
CN203
1-770-154-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 6P
1-770-470-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 6P
1-815-507-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 26P
< FERRITE BEAD >
8-12
FB103
FB104
FB105
FB106
FB107
1-469-324-21
1-469-324-21
1-469-324-21
1-469-324-21
1-469-324-21
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
0UH
0UH
0UH
0UH
0UH
FB108
FB109
FB111
FB602
FB603
1-469-324-21
1-469-324-21
1-469-324-21
1-414-226-21
1-414-226-21
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
0UH
0UH
0UH
0UH
0UH
16V
25V
MB-103
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Remarks
< RESISTOR >
< FILTER >
FL101
FL102
FL103
FL104
FL105
1-234-177-21
1-234-177-21
1-234-177-21
1-234-177-21
1-234-177-21
FILTER, CHIP EMI
FILTER, CHIP EMI
FILTER, CHIP EMI
FILTER, CHIP EMI
FILTER, CHIP EMI
R103
R104
R105
R106
R108
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-789-11
FL106
FL109
FL110
FL201
FL402
1-234-177-21
1-233-893-21
1-234-177-21
1-234-177-21
1-234-177-21
FILTER, CHIP EMI
FILTER, CHIP EMI
FILTER, CHIP EMI
FILTER, CHIP EMI
FILTER, CHIP EMI
R110
R111
R112
R113
R114
1-216-821-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-837-11
1-216-821-11
FL403
FL404
1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI
1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI
R114
R116
R117
R118
R119
1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP
0
5%
1/16W
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315/NS415)
1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP
22
5%
1/16W
1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP
1K
5%
1/16W
1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP
100K
5%
1/16W
1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP
100K
5%
1/16W
R120
R121
R123
R124
R128
1-216-821-11
1-216-821-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-809-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
1K
1K
10K
10K
100
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R129
R130
R131
R132
R133
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
100
100
100
0
0
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R134
R136
R137
R139
R141
1-216-801-11
1-216-801-11
1-216-801-11
1-216-827-11
1-216-833-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
22
22
22
3.3K
10K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R150
R156
R157
R159
R160
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
10K
10K
0
0
0
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R162
R163
R164
1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-081-00 METAL CHIP
< IC >
IC101
IC101
IC103
IC103
IC104
8-759-641-86 IC BR24C16F-E2 (NS405/NS410/NS415)
8-759-714-06 IC M24C16-WMN6T(A)
(NS405/NS410/NS415)
6-701-879-01 IC CY24233ZCT
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
6-701-877-01 IC SM8707EV-G-E2
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315/NS415)
6-701-837-01 IC MB91307RPFV-G-BND-E1
IC106
IC106
6-801-942-01 IC MBM29LV160BE-90TN-D006 (NS315:US4)
6-801-941-01 IC MBM29LV160BE-90TN-D005
(NS305:AEP1,UK/NS310:AEP1/NS405:AEP1,UK/NS410:AEP1)
IC106
8-759-689-92 IC MBM29LV160BE-90TN
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315:US,CND,PX/NS415)
IC107
6-801-933-01 IC MR27V1602E-6G2TPZ
(NS315:MX1,MX2,E,AR,BR)
IC201
6-701-700-01 IC SP3728ACB
IC201
IC202
IC301
IC302
IC303
8-759-828-02 IC SP3728AC
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315/NS415)
6-701-878-01 IC FAN8034L
6-701-876-01 IC CXD9703R
8-759-599-45 IC MM1385ENLE
6-701-969-01 IC K4F151612D-UL60T
IC401
IC402
IC403
IC404
IC405
6-702-300-01
8-759-599-45
8-752-416-45
6-700-353-01
6-700-353-01
IC601
6-701-565-01 IC CXD9627A-E2
IC TK11118CSCL-G
IC MM1385ENLE
IC CXD1935Q
IC MT48LC1M16A1TG-6STR
IC MT48LC1M16A1TG-6STR
(NS305/NS310/NS405/NS410/NS415:ME5,AUS)
R164
R164
< COIL >
L101
L201
L202
1-412-028-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 4.7uH
1-412-031-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 47uH
1-412-031-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 47uH
R164
R164
< TRANSISTOR >
Q201
Q202
8-729-903-46 TRANSISTOR
8-729-903-46 TRANSISTOR
R164
2SB1132-T100-QR
2SB1132-T100-QR
R164
R164
8-13
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
100
100
100
100
2.2
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
METAL CHIP
1K
5%
1/16W
METAL CHIP
100
5%
1/16W
METAL CHIP
100
5%
1/16W
METAL CHIP
22K
5%
1/16W
METAL CHIP
1K
5%
1/16W
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
3.3K
5%
1/16W
3.3K
5%
1/16W
22K
5%
1/10W
(NS315:MX1,MX2,E,AR,BR)
1-216-069-00 METAL CHIP
6.8K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:AEP2/NS310:AEP2/NS405:AEP2/NS410:AEP2)
1-216-065-91 RES-CHIP
4.7K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:RU)
1-216-075-00 METAL CHIP
12K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:AEP1,UK/NS310:AEP1/NS405:AEP1,UK/NS410:AEP1)
1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP
470
5%
1/10W
(NS305:AUS/NS415:AUS)
1-216-047-91 RES-CHIP
820
5%
1/10W
(NS305:EA,ME5/NS415:ME5)
1-216-654-11 METAL CHIP
1.3K
0.5% 1/10W
(NS305:ME2)
1-216-057-00 METAL CHIP
2.2K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:HK,SP,TW,KR)
MB-103
Ref. No.
R165
R166
R168
R169
R169
R169
Part No.
Description
Remarks
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
5%
1/16W
5%
1/10W
(NS405/NS410/NS415)
1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP
3.3K
5%
1/16W
1-216-069-00 METAL CHIP
6.8K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:RU)
1-216-089-91 RES-CHIP
47K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,ME2,EA,ME5/
NS310/NS405/NS410/NS415:ME5)
R246
R248
R249
R250
R251
1-216-809-11
1-216-803-11
1-216-803-11
1-218-895-11
1-216-841-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
100
33
33
100K
47K
5%
5%
5%
0.5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/10W
1/16W
R252
R253
R254
R255
R256
1-216-839-11
1-218-889-11
1-218-895-11
1-218-889-11
1-216-809-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
33K
56K
100K
56K
100
5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
5%
1/16W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/16W
R259
R260
R261
R262
R263
1-216-833-11
1-216-834-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-815-11
1-216-861-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
10K
12K
10K
330
2.2M
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP
1-216-089-91 RES-CHIP
3.3K
47K
Remarks
R176
R178
R180
1-216-075-00 METAL CHIP
12K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:AUS/NS315:MX,E,AR,BR/NS415:AUS)
1-216-081-00 METAL CHIP
22K
5%
1/10W
(NS305:HK,SP,TW,KR)
1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP
0
5%
1/16W
1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP
10K
5%
1/16W
1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP
100
5%
1/16W
R181
R182
R183
R184
R185
1-216-864-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-821-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
0
100
100
10K
1K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R264
R265
R269
R273
R301
1-216-845-11
1-216-838-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-295-91
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
SHORT
100K
27K
10K
0
0
R206
R207
R210
R211
R212
1-216-829-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-815-11
1-216-809-11
1-216-809-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
4.7K
100
330
100
100
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R302
R303
R311
R312
R313
1-216-295-91
1-216-821-11
1-216-809-11
1-218-831-11
1-216-817-11
SHORT
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
0
1K
100
220
470
5%
5%
0.5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/10W
1/16W
R213
R214
R216
R217
R218
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-821-11
1-216-821-11
1-216-846-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
10K
10K
1K
1K
120K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R314
R315
R316
R317
R318
1-216-817-11
1-216-817-11
1-216-829-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-817-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
470
470
4.7K
10K
470
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R219
R220
R221
R222
R223
1-216-846-11
1-216-847-11
1-216-847-11
1-216-842-11
1-216-842-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
120K
150K
150K
56K
56K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R319
R320
R321
R322
R323
1-218-871-11
1-218-883-11
1-218-879-11
1-218-847-11
1-218-855-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
10K
33K
22K
1K
2.2K
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R224
R225
R226
R227
R229
1-216-850-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-853-11
1-216-846-11
1-216-833-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
270K
10K
470K
120K
10K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R324
R325
R326
R327
R328
1-216-833-11
1-218-867-11
1-216-833-11
1-218-871-11
1-216-838-11
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
10K
6.8K
10K
10K
27K
5%
5%
5%
0.5%
5%
1/16W
1/10W
1/16W
1/10W
1/16W
R230
R231
R232
R233
R234
1-216-839-11
1-216-855-11
1-216-839-11
1-216-853-11
1-216-803-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
33K
680K
33K
470K
33
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R329
R330
R331
R332
R333
1-216-825-11
1-216-825-11
1-216-825-11
1-216-825-11
1-216-847-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
2.2K
2.2K
2.2K
2.2K
150K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R235
R236
R238
R239
R240
1-216-809-11
1-216-803-11
1-216-839-11
1-216-839-11
1-216-839-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
100
33
33K
33K
33K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R334
R335
R336
R346
R347
1-218-853-11
1-216-829-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
1.8K
4.7K
10K
10K
10K
0.5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R241
R242
R243
R244
R245
1-216-839-11
1-216-849-11
1-216-853-11
1-216-821-11
1-216-841-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
33K
220K
470K
1K
47K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R348
R349
R351
R352
R358
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-833-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
SHORT
SHORT
METAL CHIP
10K
10K
0
0
10K
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
5%
1/16W
R169
8-14
MB-103
Ref. No.
R359
R360
R401
Part No.
Description
Remarks
R403
1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP
10K
5%
1/16W
1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP
100
5%
1/16W
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-295-91 SHORT
0
(NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405:AEP1,AEP2,UK/NS410/NS415)
1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP
470
5%
1/16W
R405
R406
R407
R408
R409
1-216-809-11
1-218-831-11
1-218-831-11
1-218-831-11
1-218-831-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
100
220
220
220
220
5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
1/16W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
1/10W
R410
R411
R412
R413
R414
1-218-831-11
1-218-831-11
1-216-833-11
1-218-867-11
1-216-822-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
220
220
10K
6.8K
1.2K
0.5%
0.5%
5%
5%
5%
1/10W
1/10W
1/16W
1/10W
1/16W
R423
R426
R430
R439
R601
1-216-833-11
1-216-833-11
1-216-797-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-809-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
10K
10K
10
0
100
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R607
R608
R609
R612
R621
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
1-216-864-11
METAL CHIP
0
5%
1/16W
METAL CHIP
0
5%
1/16W
METAL CHIP
0
5%
1/16W
METAL CHIP
0
5%
1/16W
METAL CHIP
0
5%
1/16W
(NS305/NS310/NS405/NS410/NS415:ME5,AUS)
R402
Ref. No.
4
4
4
4
0 11
0 11
0 11
0 11
0 11
0 11
0 11
0 11
0 11
15
16
< COMPOSITION CIRCUIT BLOCK >
* RB102
1-233-270-11 NETWORK, RES (8 GANG) 10K
< VARIABLE RESISTOR >
RV401
Part No.
Description
MS-81
Remarks
MISCELLANEOUS
**************
1-468-645-11 POWER BLOCK
(NS305:TW/NS315:US,CND,MX/NS415:US,CND)
1-468-646-11 POWER BLOCK
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,KR/
NS315:AR/NS415:ME5,AUS)
1-468-647-11 POWER BLOCK (NS315:PX,E,BR)
1-468-648-11 POWER BLOCK
(NS305:AEP,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
1-575-651-21 CORD, POWER
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU,ME2,EA,ME5,HK,SP/NS310/
NS315:PX,E,AR/NS405/NS410/NS415:ME5)
1-757-140-11 CORD, POWER
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,SP/NS315:PX,E,AR,BR/NS415:ME5)
1-757-571-11 CORD, POWER
(NS315:US,CND/NS415:US,CND)
1-782-752-31 CORD, POWER (NS305:KR)
1-783-531-11 CORD, POWER (NS315:MX)
1-783-531-31 CORD, POWER
(NS315:US,CND,MX/NS415:US,CND)
1-790-390-41 CORD, POWER (NS305:TW)
1-790-588-11 CORD, POWER (NS305:AUS/NS415:AUS)
1-823-597-11 CORD, POWER
(NS315:US,CND/NS415:US,CND)
1-961-634-11 PF-127 (HARNESS)
1-961-632-11 FF-206 (HARNESS) (NS415)
22
1-823-831-11 FAE-9
(NS305:AEP1,AEP2,UK,RU/NS310/NS405/NS410)
54
57
58
M001
S001
1-823-830-11
1-823-829-11
1-823-828-11
1-763-790-11
1-786-133-11
FMS-17 (FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE)
FMO-4 (FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE)
FMM-41 (FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE)
MOTOR, DC (LOADING)
SWITCH, ROTARY
CN001 1-815-412-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P
************************************************************
1-223-583-11 RES, ADJ, CARBON 1K
< VIBRATOR >
X101
1-795-174-11 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (16.5MHz)
X102
1-781-867-21 VIBRATOR, CRYSTAL (27MHz)
************************************************************
MS-81J MOUNT (NOT SUPPLIED)
***************************
< CONNECTOR >
* CN001
1-815-412-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P
< SWITCH >
S001
1-786-133-11 SWITCH, ROTARY
************************************************************
8-15E
ACCESSORIES
***********
1-477-167-11 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D141A)
(NS305:ME2,EA,ME5,AUS,HK,SP,TW,KR/NS315)
1-477-168-11 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D142A)
(NS415:US,CND)
1-477-168-41 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D142O)
(NS415:ME5,AUS)
1-477-170-11 REMOTE COMMANDER (RMT-D142P)
(NS310/NS405/NS410)
1-569-008-21 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P
(NS305:EA/NS315:PX,E,AR)
1-751-271-11 CORD, CONNECTION
(NS305/NS310/NS315:US,CND,PX,MX,E/
NS405/NS410/NS415)
1-770-019-11 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION PLUG 3P
(NS305:UK,HK/NS405:UK)
1-823-364-21 CORD, CONNECTION
DVP-NS305/NS310/NS315/NS405/NS410/NS415
Sony Corporation
9-929-717-11
Home Video Company
— 140 —
2002C1600-1
©2002.3
Published by Quality Assurance Dept.